INSTALLATION & OPERATING MANUAL

(lOM)

50MMBTU

ONOE THROUGH STEAM GENERATOR

FAHUD STEAM INJEOTION PROJEOT - PHASE I

Prepared for:

\1. mI eI
' " �(
.
" " ';
. WliA)·
;. .

"J'"'.
. . I,JJ .
.
' 'IQ\t.\1.olI JI-,,",J.'"
•. ."
.

. (J'JJ

Worl�y�arsons .Arablall.lnd.. ustries·�J.

\

.
CoNJR,4.C1NQ,,:C31l0606 PRQJ, NQ,: I>AjP00060

BOOK8

Customer Reference Number : PAlp·00060

Customer P.O. Number: WPAII2007.00060.05.5003

EN·FAB, Inc. Work Order Number : 207009

UNIT TAG NO: F·6101 A·D

. Rev ND. Prepared By Issue Date Revision Description Checked By Approved Bv

I
'.
.<\ 0 RS ORIGINAL ISSUE MM
J
 PLC- HMI PANEL
TABLE OF CONTENT
W.O#207009
BOOKS

• ALLEN-BRADLEY CONTROLLOGIX
DIGITAL 110 MODULES

I
/
 WORLEY PARSONS-ARABIAN INDUSTRIES (JV)
FAHUD STEAM INJECTION PROJECT, PHASE I
STEAM AND WATER PLANT
PURCHASE ORDER N2 WPAI/2007-PAIP00060-05-5003

ALLEN-BRADLEyTM
CONTROLLOGIX
DIGITAL 1/0 MODULES

)
i) Allen-Bradley

Controllogix
Digital 110 Modules

Input Modules
1756·IA16, ·IA1G1, ·IA8D, ·IB16,
·IB16D, ·IB161, ·IB32, ·IC16, ·IH161,
·IM161, ·IN16, ·IV16, ·IV32

Output Modules
1756·0A16, ·OA161, ·OA8, ·OA8D,
·OA8E, ·OB16D, ·OB16E, ·OB161,
·OB32, ·OB8, ·OB8EI, ·OC8, ·OH81,
·ON8, OV16E, ·OW161, ·OX81
•

User Manual

Rockwell
Automation
Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this
publication, those responsible for the application and use of this
control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps
have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all
performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws,
regulations, codes and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown

in this gUide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there
are many variables and requirements associated with any particular
installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability
(to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon
the examples shown in this publication,

Allen-Bradley publication SGI-l.l, Safety Guidelines for the

Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Allen-Bradley office) describes some
'
important differences between solid-state equipment and
electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration
when applying products such as those described in this publication,

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole

or part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is
prohibited.

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety

considerations:

ATTENTION, Identifies information about practices or

circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage or economic loss

Attention statements help you to:

• identify a hazard
• avoid a hazard
• recognize the consequences

Identifies information that is critical for successful

IMPORTANT
application and understanding of the product.

Allen-Bradley Is a lrademark or Rockwell AutomatIon

 European Communities (EC) If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within
the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and
Directive Compliance tested to meet the following directives.

EMe Directive

This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89/336/EC

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following
standards, in whole or in part, documented in a technical
construction file:

• EN 50081-2 EMC- Generic Emission Standard, Part 2-

Industrial Environment

• EN 50082-2 EMC - Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 -

Industrial Environment

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

low Voltage Directive

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low

Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 6 1 1 3 1-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 - Equipment Requirements and
Tests. For specific information required by EN 6 1 1 3 1-2, see the
appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the Allen-Bradley
publication Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
For Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4 . 1 .

Open style devices must be provided with environmental and safety

protection by proper mounting in enclosures designed for specific
application conditions. See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC
publication 529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of
protection provided by different types of enclosure.

)
Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide, with over 7 5
sales/support offices, 5 1 2 authorized distributors and 260 authorized
Support systems integrators located throughout the United States alone, as well
as Rockwell Automation representatives in every major country in the
world.

local Product Support

Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for:

• sales and order support

• product technical training
• warranty support
• support service agreements

Technical Product Assistance

If you need to contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance,

please review the troubleshooting information first. If the problem
persists, then call your local Rockwell Automation representative.

Your Questions or Comments on this Manual

If you find a problem with this manual, please notify us of it on the

enclosed Publication Problem Report.
 Summary of Changes

Introduction
I
This release of this document contains updated information. Changes
are designated by change bars in margin, as shown to the left.

New and Revised The table below lists the new and revised information included in this
release of the ControlLogix digital I/O modules user manual.
Information
Table Summary of Changes.1
New and Revised Information

Information About New or Revised location

Internal Module Operations New Chapter 2
Connections Revised Chapter 2
Electronic Keying Revised Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Output Data Echo Revised Chapter 3
Chapter 4
1756-IV16 Module New Chapter 3
Chapter 7
1 756-IV32 Module New Chapter 3
Chapter 7
1 756-0V16E Module New Chapter 3
Chapter 7
Additional Index Terms Revised and New Index

Publication 17S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

Summary of Changes 2

Notes:

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Preface

About This User Manual

What This Preface Contains This preface describes how to use this manual. The following table
describes what this preface contains and its location.

For information about: See page:

Who Should Use This Manual Preface·l
Purpose of This Manual Preface·1
Related Terms Preface·2
Related Products and Documentation Preface-4

Who Should Use You must be able to program and operate an Allen-Bradley
ControlLogix™ Logix5550 controller to efficiently use your digital I/O
This Manual modules.

We assume that you know how to do this in this manual. If you do

not, refer to the Logix5550 Controller documentation before you
attempt to use this module. Table C lists related documentation.

Purpose of This Manual This manual describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot
your ControlLogix digital I/O module.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

Preface 2

Related Terms This manual uses the following terms:

Table Preface.B
Related Terms

This term: Means:

Broadcast Data transmissions to all address or functions
Bumpless A reconfiguration in which the real time data connection to the
reconfiguration module is not closed and reopened. Communications are never
interrupted and configuration data is applied to the module
immediately. This works best in a single owner-controller
system.
Change of state (COS) Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an 110 module
Communications Format that defines the type of information transferred
format between an 110 module and its owner controller. This format
also defines the tags created for each 110 module.
Compatible match An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the
physical module and the module configured in the software to
match according to vendor and catalog number. In this case,
the minor revision of the module must greater than or equal to
that of the configured slot.
Connection The communication mechanism from the controller to another
module in the control system
ControlBus The backplane used by the 1756 chassis
Coordinated system Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within
time (CST) a single Control Bus chassis
Direct connection An 110 connection where the controller establishes an
individual connection with 110 modules
Disable keying An electronic keying protection mode that requires no
attributes of the physical module and the module configured in
the software to match
Download The process of transferring the contents of a project on the
workstation into the controller
Electronic keying A feature where modules can be requested to perform an
electronic check to make sure that the physical module is
consistent with what was configured by the software
Exact match An electronic keying protection mode that requires the physical
module and the module configured in the software to match
according to vendor, catalog number, major revision and minor
revision
Field side Interface between user field wiring and 110 module
Inhibit A ControlLogix process that allows you to configure an
110 module but prevent it from communicating with the owner
controller. In this case, the controller behaves as if the 110
module does not exist at all
Interface module (lFM) A module that uses prewired cable to connect wiring to
an 110 module
Listen·only connection An 110 connection where another controller ownslprovides the
configuration and data for the module

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Preface 3

I
Table Preface.B
Related Terms

Major revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional
change to the module
Minor revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to
the module that does not affect its function or interface
Multicast Data transmissions which reach a specific group of one or
more destinations
Multiple owners A configuration set-up where multiple owner controllers
use exactly the same configuration information to
simultaneously own an input module
Network update time The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be
(NUT) sent on a ControlNet network. The NUT ranges from 2ms to
lOOms
Owner controller The controller that creates and stores the primary
configuration and communication connection to a module
Program Mode Controller program is not executing.
Inputs are still actively producing data.
Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured
program mode
Rack connection An 110 connection where the 1 756-CNB module collects digital
110 words into a rack image to conserve Control Net
connections and bandwidth
Rack optimization A communications format in which the 1 756-CNB module
collects all digital 110 words in the remote chassis and sends
them to controller as a single rack image
Remote connection An 110 connection where the controller establishes an
individual connection with 110 modules in a remote chassis
Removal and insertion ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or remove a
under power (RIUP) module or RTB while power is applied
Removable Terminal Field wiring connector for 110 modules
Block (RTB)
Requested packet The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of
interval (RPI) 110 data
Run mode Controller program is executing
Inputs are actively producing data.
Outputs are actively controlled
Service A system feature that is performed on user demand, such as
fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset
System side Backplane side of the interface to the 110 module
Tag A named area of the controller's memory where data is stored
Timestamping ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a
relative time reference of when that change occurred

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

Preface 4

Related Products and The following table lists related ControlLogix products and
documentation:
Documentation
Table Preface.C
Related Documentation

Catalog Document title: Pub. number:

number.
1 756·A4. ControlLogix Chassis Installation Instructions 1 756-INOBOB
-A7, -Al0.
-A13
1 756-PA72, ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1 756-5.57
-PB72
1 756-PA75, ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1 756-5.78
-PB75
1 756·Series ControlLogix Module Installation Instructions Multiple 1 756·IN
(Each module has separate installation document.) numbers
1 756-Series ControlLogix System User Manual 1 755-UMOOl
1 756-Series ControlLogix Analog 1/0 Modules User Manual 1 756-6.5.9
1 756-CNB, ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module User 1 756·6.5.3
-CNBR Manual
1 756-DHRIO ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Communication 1 756-6.5.14
Interface Module User Manual
1 756-ENET ControlLogix Ethernet Communication Interface 1 756-UM051
Module User Manual

If you need more information on these products, contact your local

Allen-Bradley integrator or sales office for assistance. For more
information on the documentation, refer to the Allen-Bradley
Publication Index, publication SD499.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Table of Contents

Chapter 1
What Are Controllogix Digital 110 What This Chapter Contains . . .. . . . ... ... . .... .. ..
. 1-1
Modules? What are ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules? .. ..... ... . 1-1
Using an 110 Module in the ControlLogix System. ...... . 1-2
Features of the ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules .... . 1-4
Using Module Identification and Status Information . .... . 1 -5
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge . . .. . . .. ....... .... 1-6
Removal and Insertion Under Power. ... . ... . .. . .... . 1-6
Chapter Summary and What's Next.. . .... ... .. . ..... 1-6

Chapter 2
Digital 110 Operation in the What This Chapter Contains ....... . . ..... . ....... 2- 1
.

Controllogix System Ownership . .... ... . ... .. .. . .... .... .......... 2-2
.

Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 ...... .. . .... .... 2-2

1/0 Modules in Local Chassis.. ... ....... ........ 2-2
1/0 Modules in Remote Chassis . ..... ............ 2-3
Internal Module Operations. ... .. .... ............. 2-4
.

Input Modules. . . .. .. .. ..... .. .. ..... .... .... 2-4

Output Modules. . . .... . .. .. .. .. .... ......... 2-5
.

Connections . . .. ... .... ... .. . .. . .... ... ........ 2-6

Direct Connections .. . ... . ..... ... . .......... 2-6
.

Rack Connections ... .... .. .. . .. .... ..... .. .. 2-7

.

Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage ... ....... .. 2-8

Input Module Operation . . . . ... ... .. .. ... ...... .. 2-9
.

Input Modules in a Local Chassis . . . 2-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Requested Packet Interval (RPI) . . . . 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change of State (COS) . .. .. . . . . 2- 1 0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input Modules i n a Remote Chassis.. . . 2-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario . . . . . 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario . .. . . 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . .

Output Module Operation. ... . . . .

. . . 2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output Modules in a Local Chassis . . 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output Modules in a Remote Chassis . 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Best Case RPI Multicast ScenaIio. . . 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario . . . . 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Listen-Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multiple Owners of Input Modules . .. . 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration Changes in an Input Module

with Multiple Owners . . . .
. . .. . .. . . . . 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter Summary and What's Next . .. . 2-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C-EN-P March 2001 •

 Table of Contents ii

I
Chapter 3
Controllogix Standard Digital 1/0 What This Chapter Contains .......... . ..... 3-1
_ _ . . . . _

Module Features Determining Input Module Compatibility. . .. .. .. .. . . . . 3-1

Determining Output Module Compatibility. ... .... .... 3-2 .

Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard

Digital I/O Modules . . _ . . _ . ...... 3-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _

Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) . ... .. ... 3-3

Module Fault Reporting . ...... ........ .. . . 3-3 . . _ _ .

Fully Software Configurable . ... . . . . .. . ...... . . .. 3-3

Electronic Keying. .. . ... .. .. ... . .... . ... ... ... 3-4
Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and
Schedule Outputs . . .. . . _ 3-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _

Producer/Consumer Model. .... ........ . . ... 3-9 . . . _

LED Status Information...... .......... . 3-10 _ . . . . . _ .

Full Class I Division 2 Compliance .... .. . . .... . 3-10 . . _

CE/CSA/ULlFM Agency Approvals .. .... . 3-11 . . _ . . . . _ .

Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules ...... 3-11 _

Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time. 3-11

Software Configurable Filter Times. . ...... ....... 3-11 _

Isolated and Non-Isolated Varieties of Modules....... 3-1 2

Multiple POint Densities . . . ..
......... .. 3-12 . _ . . . _ . .

Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules . .. . 3-12 _

Configurable Point-Level Output Fault States... . . . . . 3-12

.
.

Output Data Echo ... .. _ ... 3-13

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Field Wiring Options ... _ .... 3-14

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . _

Multiple Point Densities ...... ...... ..... ..... 3-14 . _

Fusing.... ........
. . .......... 3-14
_ . . . . . . . . . _ _ _

F ield Power Loss Detection . .. ...... ........ . 3-17 . . _

Diagnostic Latch of Information .. ............... 3-17 _

Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules

and Controllers. ... .........
_ _ ............ . 3-18 . . . . .

Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules

and Controller ........... .. ............ ..... 3-19 . _ .

Chapter Summary and What's Next ........ 3-21 _ . _ . . . _ _ . _

Chapter 4
Controllogix Diagnostic What This Chapter Contains . .... ... . .. .. ... .. ... . _ 4-1
Digital 1/0 Module Features Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility. .. ... 4-1
Determining Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility .. .. 4-2
Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic
Digital I/O Modules ... . _ _ ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 4-3
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) .. .. ..... 4-3
Module Fault Reporting . . .... ... . .... . .... .. ..
. 4-3
Fully Software Configurable ..... ... . ... .. ... . . _ _ 4-3
) Electronic Keying.......... ......... . . .. . _ . . . _ 4-4

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Table of Contents iii

Timestamping Inputs and Scheduling Outputs. . .. . . .. 4-7

Producer/Consumer Model. ..... . . ... . ... . ...... 4-9
LED Status Information......................... 4-10
Full Class I Division 2 Compliance ................ 4-10
CE/CSAlULlFM Agency Approvals ...... ..... ..... 4-1 1
Diagnostic Latch of Information ...... .. ......... . 4- 1 1
Diagnostic Timestamp ............... .......... 4-1 1
8 Point AC/ 16 Point DC .......... ... .. ......... 4 -1 2
Point Level Fault Reporting ..................... 4-1 2
Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules ..... 4-14
Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time. 4-14
Software Configurable Filter Times ................ 4-14
Isolated and Non-Isolated Varieties of Modules....... 4-14
Multiple Point Densities .............. ..... ..... 4-15
Open Wire Detection............ ... ........... 4- 15
Field Power Loss Detection ............ ......... 4 -1 6
Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules........ 4- 1 6
Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules .... 4-17
Configurable Point-Level Output Fault States......... 4-17
Output Data Echo .......... .................. 4-18
Field Wiring Options .... .. ............ ........ 4-19
Multiple Point Densities.. ...................... 4-19
Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

No Load Detection............................ 4-2 1

Field Side Output Verification.................... 4-22
Pulse Test .................................. 4-22
Point Level Electronic FUSing .................... 4-24
Field Power Loss Detection........... .......... 4-24
Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules ...... 4-25
Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules
and Controllers................................. 4-25
Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules
and Controller ......... ............. ........... 4-27
Chapter Summary and What's Next.... .............. 4-29

Chapter 5
Installing the ControlLogix What This Chapter Contains ............. ... . .. .... 5 - 1
I/O Module Installing the ControlLogix I/O Module ....... .. . .. .. . 5 - 1
Keying the Removable Terminal Block.. .. ... .. ... .. .. 5-2
Connecting Wiring . . .... .. .. ....... ... .. .. .. .. .. 5-4
Assembling Removable Terminal Block and the Housing .. 5-7
Choosing the Extended-Depth Housing..... ...... .. .. 5-8
Installing the Removable Terminal Block .. ............ 5-10
RemOVing the Removable Terminal Block ....... .. .... 5 - 1 2

)
RemOVing the Module from the Chassis ............... 5 - 13
Chapter Summary and What's Next ................. . 5 - 1 4

Publication 1 7S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

Table of Contents iv

Chapter 6
Configuring Your Controllogix What This Chapter Contains 6- 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Digital 1/0 Modules Configuring Your I/O Module .............. ...... " 6-2
RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software ... .. . .. . . . ... 6-2
Overview of the Configuration Process .. ... . . .. .. . ... 6-2
Creating a New Module. .. .. . . .. ... .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 6-4
Communications Format.... .. ... .... .. ... ... ... 6-6
Electronic Keying.... . .. .. .. . ... .... . . ... ..... 6-9
Using the Default Configuration..................... 6-10
Altering the Default Configuration ......... ......... . 6-10
Configuring a Standard Input Module ................ 6- 1 2
Configuring a Standard Output Module ............... 6-13
Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module ............... 6-14
Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module.............. 6-15
Editing Configuration ............................ 6-16
Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Remote Run Mode... 6-17
Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Program Mode...... 6-18
Configuring I/O Modules in a Remote Chassis .......... 6-19
Input Online Services ........... ....... ...... .... 6-21
Output Online Services........................... 6-22
V iewing and Changing Module Tags . ................ 6-23
Chapter Summary and What's Next .......... ........ 6-24

Chapter 7
Module-Specific Information What This Chapter Contains . ..... .. ..... .. .. . ... .. 7 - 1
1756-IAI 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 -2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1756-IAI 6I .. . .. .. .... .. .. .. .. ... ..... ....... .. 7-4

1756-IA8D . ................................... 7-6
1756-I B I 6... . .. .. .. .. ..... ... .. .. ..... ........ 7-8
l7 56-I B I 6D.......... ................. ..... .... 7 - 1 0
17 56-IB16I ....... .......... ................... 7 - 1 2
1756-IB32........ ..... .... .................... 7 - 1 4
1756-IC I 6. ...... .............................. 7 - 1 6
l 7 5 6-lH 161 ........ ............................ 7 - 1 8
l7 56-IM161 .......................... .......... 7 -20
1756-IN 1 6........ ............................. 7- 2 2
1756-IVI 6..................................... 7-24
17 56-IV32.......... ............. .............. 7-26
l 7 56-0A1 6 ......................... ... . ....... 7 -28
1756-0AI 6J. .... ........ ....................... 7 -30
17 56-0A8 ..................................... 7- 32
1756-0A8D.......................... . ......... 7 -34
l 7 56-0A8E.................................... 7-36
1756-0BI 6D. ................... ...... ......... 7 -38
17 56-0B1 6E ...................... ............. 7-40

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Table of Contents v

1756-0B161.................. ...... . .. ......... 7 -4 2

1756-0B32 ......... ........................... 7 -4 4
1756-0B8 . . . . . . . . . . .7 -46
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1756-0B8EI .......... .......... ............... 7-48

1756-0C8 .. ................................... 7 -50
1756-0H 8I .... ................................ 7-52
1756-0N8................... . ..... . ........... 7 -54
1756-0V 1 6E ................................... 7 -56
1756-0W 1 6I ................................... 7 -58
17 56-0X8I ......... ........................... 7-60
Chapter Summary and What's Next .... .... .......... 7-62

Chapter 8
Troubleshooting Your Module What This Chapter Contains ... ...... .. ... . ... ... .. 8- 1
Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module ... .. .... 8-1
LED indicators for input modules. .......... . ..... 8-1
LED indicators for output modules... ...... . .. .... 8-2
Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your Module.. . .... 8-4
Determining Fault Type .. .. .. .. ...... . .. . .. .... 8-5
Chapter Summary and What's Next . ... .... .. .. . .. ... 8-6

Appendix A
Using Software Module Tag Names and Definitions.................. A-3
Configuration Tags Standard Input Module Tags. .. ... .. ... .. ...... .. A- 3
Standard Output Module Tags ......... .. . .. ..... A- 4
Diagnostic Input Module Tags ... ...... . .. . .. . ... A-6
Diagnostic Output Module Tags.. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. A-8
Accessing the Tags ........ ..................... A-ll
Changing Configuration Through the Tags............ A- 1 2
Module-wide Configurable Features .............. A- 1 2
Point-by-Point Configurab1e Features ............. A- 1 3
Downloading New Configuration Data
From the Tag Editor ....... ... .. ... .... ... ...... A-1 4
Sample Series of Tags . .... .. .. .. .. .. . .. . ... . . A-1 5

Appendix B
Using ladder logic Using Message Instructions .... .. ... . ... ... .. ...... B-1
Processing Real-Time Control and Module Services. ... B-2
One Service Performed Per Instruction... .... . .. ... B-2
Creating a New Tag ......... .................... B-3
Enter Message Configuration . .. ..... . .. ... ...... B-4
Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs... B-lO
Resetting a Fuse, Performing the Pulse Test
and Resetting Latched Diagnostics ............... B-13

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Table of Contents vi

Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification

and Status .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. ... .. .. B- 1 4
Using Tags in Ladder Logic . .... . .. ... . .. .. .. B-16
_ _

Appendix C
Power Supply Sizing Chart
Appendix D
Driving Motor Starters with Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters . _ D- 2
ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules

Index

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 1

What Are Controllogix D i gital 1/0 Modules?

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes the ControlLogix digital modules and what you
must know and do before you begin to use them.

For information about: See page:

What are ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules? ,-,

Using an 110 Module in the ControlLogix 1-2

System
Types of ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules 1-2
Features of the ControlLogix Digital 110 1-4
Modules
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge '-6
Removal and Insertion Under Power '-6
Chapter Summary and What's Next 1-6

What are ControlLogix ControlLogix digital I/O modules are input/output modules that
provide ON/OFF detection and actuation.
Digital 1/0 Modules?
Using the producer/consumer network model, they can produce
information when needed while providing additional system
functions.

The following is a list of the features available on ControlLogix digital

I/O modules that allow greater system applicability,

• Removal and insertion under power (RIUP) - This system feature

allows you to remove and insert modules and RTB while power
is applied. For more information on RJUP, see page 1-6.

• Producer/consumer communications - These communications

are an intelligent data exchange between modules and other
system devices in which each module produces data without
having been polled.

• System timestamp of data - A 64-bit system clock places a

timestamp on the transfer of data between the module and its
owner-controller within the local chassis.

• Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection

• Class I Division 2, UL, CSA, FM and CE Agency Certification

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 1-2 What Are ControlLogix Digital Ito Modules?

Using an I/O Module in ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and use a
Removable Terminal Block (RTB) or a Bulletin 1492 Interface Module
the Controllogix System cable that connects to an IFM to connect all field-side wiring.

Before you install and use your module you should have already:

• installed and grounded a 1756 chassis and power supply. To

install these products. refer to the publications listed in
Table l .A.

Table 1.A
Chassis and Power Supply Documentation

Catalog Document title: Pub. number:

number:
1756-A4, -A7, ControlLogix Chassis Installation Instructions 1 756-IN080B
-A10, -A13
1756-PA72. ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1 756-5.67
-PB72
1756-PA75, ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756-5.78
-PB75

• ordered and received an RTB or IFM and its components for

your application.

RTBs and IFMs are not included with your

module purchase.

Table 1.B
Types of ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules

Catalog Description: RTB:

Number:
1756-IA16 79-132V ac 16 pI. input module 20 pin
1 756-IA 161 . 79-132V ac 1 6 pI. isolated input module 36 pin
1756-IA8D 79-132V ac 8pt. diagnostic input module 2D pin
1756-IB16 10-31V dc 16 pt. input module 20 pin
1756-IB16D 1 D-3DV dc diagnostic input module 36 pin
1756-IB161 1 O-3DV dc 16 pt. isolated input module 36 pin
1 756-1832 10-31V dc 32 pt. input module 36 pin
1756-IC16 30-60V dc 16 pt. input module 20 pin
1756-IH161 90-146V dc 16 pt. isolated input module 36 pin
1756-IM161 1 59-265V ac 16 pt. isolated input module 36 pin
1756-IN16 1 O-30V ac 16 pt. input module 20 pin
1756-IV16 10-31V dc 16 pI. sourcing current input module 20 pin
) 1756-IV32 1 0-31V dc 32 pt. sourcing current input module 36 pin

Publication 1 J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules? 1-3

Table l o B
Types of ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules

Catalog Description: RTB:

Number:
1 756-0A16 74-265V ae 1 6 pt. output module 20 pin
1 756-0A161 74-265V ae 1 6 pt. isolated output module 36 pin
1 756-0AS 74-265V ae 1 6 pt. output module 20 pin
1 756-0ASD 74-132V ae S pt. diagnostic output module 20 pin
1 756-0ASE 74-132V ae S pt. e-fused output module 20 pin
1 756-0B16D 1 9-30V de 1 6 pt. diagnostic output module 36 pin
1 756-0B16E 1O-31V de 16 pt. e-fused output module 20 pin
1 756-0B161 1 0-30V de 16 pt. isolated output module 36 pin
1 756-0B32 10-31V de 32 pt. output module 36 pin
1 756-0BS 1 0-30V de S pt. output module 20 pin
1 756-0BSEI 1 0-30V de S pt. e-fused isolated output module 36 pin
1 756-0CS 30-60V de S pt. output module 20 pin
1 756-0HSI 90-146V de S pt. isolated output module 36 pin
1 756-0NS 1 0-30V ae S pI. output module 20 pin
1 756-0V16E 10-31V de 1 6 pt. e-fused sinking current 20 pin
output module
1 756-0W161 1 0-265V 1 6 pt. isolated relay output module 36 pin
1 756-0XSI 1 0-265V, 5-150V de S pt. isolated relay normally 36 pin
open, normally closed output module

1
/

Publication 1 7 56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

1-4 What Are Controllogix Digital 110 Modules?

Features of the Controllogix Digital 110 Modules

Controllogix 1/0 Module

DC OUTPUT
8

0 D12lH&!:Ej
Indicators --- Locking tab
o 51

e
Removable Terminal Block

I
CIt ell
CIt CIt

r
CD CD
Top an
bottom
Connector pins CD CD
guides CIt CD Slots for
Control us keying the
Connector • CD RTB
CD ell
It ell
CD It
o It •

40Z00-M

ControIBus connector The backplane connector interface for the

-

ControlLogix system connects the module to the ControlEus

backplane_

Connectors pins Input!output, power and grounding connections

-

are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or
IFM.

Locking tab The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM cable on the
-

module, maintaining wiring connections.

Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent

-

inadvertently making the wrong wire connections to your module.

Status indicators Indicators display the status of communication,

-

module health and input!output devices. Use these indicators to help

in troubleshooting.

Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the

-

RTB or IFM cable onto the module.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 What Are Controllogix Digital 1/0 Modules? 1-5

Using Module Each ControlLogix I/O module maintains specific identification

information that separates it from all other modules. This information
Identification and Status assists you in tracking all the components of your system.
Information
For example, you can track module identification information to be
aware of exactly what modules are located in any ControlLogix rack at
any time. While retrieving module identity, you can also retrieve the
module's status.

Each module maintains the following information:

Table 1.C
Module Identification and Status Information

Module Identification: Description:

Product Type Module's product type, such as Digital I/O or
Analog I/O module
Catalog Code Module's catalog number
Major Revision Module's major revision number
Minor Revision Module's minor revision number
Status Module's status. Returns the following information:
• Controller ownership (if any)
• Whether module has been configured
• Device Specific Status, such as:
-Self-Test
-Flash update in progress
-Communications fault
-Not owned (outputs in prog. mode)
-Internal fault (need flash update)
-Run mode
-Program mode (output mods only)
• Minor recoverable fault
• Minor unrecoverable fault
• Major recoverable fault
• Major unrecoverable fault
Vendor 10 Module manufacturer vendor, for example Allen-Bradley
Serial Number Module serial number
Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module's text string
ASCII Text String Number of characters in module's text string

You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this

IM�ORTANT
information. For more information on how to
retrieve module identification information, see
Appendix B.
)

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

1-6 What Are Cowollogix Digital 110 Modules?

Preventing Electrostatic This module is sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Discharge
Electrostatic discharge can damage
integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch
backplane connector pins. Follow these gUidelines
when you handle the module:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge static
potential
• Wear an approved wrist-strap grounding device
• Do not touch the backplane connector or
connector pins
• Do not touch circuit components inside the
module
• If available, use a static-safe work station
• When not in use, keep the module in its
static-shield box

Removal and Insertion These modules are designed to be installed or removed while chassis
power is applied.
Under Power

�T;TENTION; When you insert or remove a module while

backplane power is applied, an electrical arc may
occur. An electrical arc can cause personal injury or
property damage by:
• sending an erroneous signal to your system's
field devices causing unintended machine
motion or loss of process controL
• causing an explosion in a hazardous
environment.
Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to
contacts on both the module and its mating
connectors. Worn contacts may create electrical
resistance that can affect module operation.

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • what ControlLogix digital 110 modules are .
• types of ControlLogix digital I/O modules.

Move on to Chapter 2, Digital 1/0 Operation in the ControlLogix

System.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
 Chapter 2

D i g ital 110 Operation i n the

Controllogix System

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how digital 1/0 modules work within the
ControlLogix system.

For information about: See page:

Ownership Z-Z

Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 z-z

Internal Module Operations 2-4

Direct Connections 2-6
Input Module Operation 2-9
Input Modules in a Local Chassis 2-10
Requested Packet Interval (RPI) 2-10
Change of State (COS) 2-10
Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 2-11
Output Module Operation 2-14
Output Modules in a Local Chassis 2-14
Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 2-15
Listen-Only Mode 2-17
Multiple Owners of Input Modules 2-18
Configuration Changes in an Input Module 2-19
with Multiple Owners
Rack Connections 2-7
Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 2-8
Chapter Summary and What's Next 2-20

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

2-2 Oi9itai l/0 Operation in the Controllogix System

Ownership Every 110 module in the ControlLogix system must be owned by a

Logix5550 Controller. This owner-controller:

• stores configuration data for every module that it owns.

• can be local or remote in regard to the 110 module's position.
• sends the I/O module configuration data to define the module's
behavior and begin operation with the control system.

Each ControlLogix I/O module must continuously maintain

communication with its owner to operate normally.

Typically, each module in the system will have only 1 owner. Input
modules can have more than 1 owner. Output modules, however, are
limited to a single owner.

For more information on the increased flexibility provided by multiple

owners and the ramifications of using multiple owners, see page 2-13.

Using RSNetWorx and The I/O configuration portion of RSLogix5000 generates the
configuration data for each I/O module in the control system, whether
RSLogix 5000 the module is located in a local or remote chassis. A remote chassis,
also known as networked, contains the I/O module but not the
module's owner controller.

Configuration data is transferred to the controller during the program

download and subsequently transferred to the appropriate I/O
modules.

110 Modules in local Chassis

I/O modules in the same chassis as the controller are ready to run as
soon as the configuration data has been downloaded.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Di9itai l/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-3

1/0 Modules in Remote Chassis

You must run RSNetWorx to enable 1/0 modules in the networked

chassis. Running RSNetWorx transfers configuration data to networked
modules and establishes a Network Update Time (NUT) for
ControlNet. The NUT is compliant with the desired communications
options specified for each module during configuration.

If you are not using 110 modules in a networked

chassis, running RSNetWorx is not necessary.
However, anytime a controller references an 1/0
module in a networked chassis, you must run
RSNetWorx to configure ControlNet.

Follow these guidelines when configuring 1/0 modules:

1. Configure all 110 modules for a given controller using RSLogix

5000 and download that information to the controller.

2. If the 110 configuration data references a module in a remote

chassis, run RSNetWorx.

RSNetWorx must be run whenever a new module is

added to a networked chassis. When a module is
permanently removed from a remote chaSSiS, we
recommend that Networx be run to optimize the
allocation of network bandwidth.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P· March 2001

2-4 Digital 110 Operation in the ControlLogix System

Internal Module Operations Signal propogation delays exist with ControlLogix [(0 modules that
must be accounted for when operating them. Some of these delays are
user selectable, and some are inherent to the module hardware. For
example, there is a small delay (typically less than I mS) between
when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module
and when a signal is sent to the system over the ControlBus (This
typical time reflects a fIlter time choice of OmS for a DC input.) .

This section offers a graphical explanation of the time limitations with

ControlLogix 110 modules.

Input Modules

As shown below, ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the

RTB and process it internally (i.e. hardware delay, filter delay, ASIC
delay) before sending a signal to the ControIBus via the Requested
Packet Interval (RPI) or at the Change of State (COS) .

/O�) ��'------.Jf---IJ 0 �--:\

Hardware delay filter delay ASIC delay

Signal applied Varies between User configurab!e 200�S scan Signal sent to
at the RTB modules and Control Bus
application
42101
configuration

Many factors (e.g. module type, voltage,

temperature, if the module is turning ON or OFF)
affect the signal propogation delay on a module. But
a typical delay time can be estimated.
For example, if you are turning ON a 1756-IB1 6
module, the signal propogation delay is affected by:
• hardware delay to energize the module (typically
200�S on this module)
• user-configurable filter time (0, I, or 2mS)
• ASIC scan (200�S)
In the best case scenario (i.e. filter time of OmS) ,
the 1756-IB16 module has a 400�S signal
propogation delay at 24V dc in 25"C.
These times are not guaranteed . We list maximum
delay times for each module in the specificatons.

Publication 1756·UM05BC·EN·P March 2001

-
 Digital 110 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-5

Output Modules

ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and

process it internally (i.e. ASIC delay and hardware delay) before
sending a signal to the output device via the RTB.

�Iol
Hardware delay

:",0,
ASIC delay
,

' ''-. /

;:
Signa! received I
Typically 10�S Varies between
modules and
application
Signal sent from
from controller RTB output point
configuration

42702

As previously stated, many factors (e.g. module type,

voltage, temperature, if the module is turning ON or
OFF) affect the signal propogation delay on a
module. But a typical delay time can be estimated.
For example, if you are turning ON a 1 7S6-0B16E
module, the signal propogation delay is affected by:
• hardware delay to energize the module (typically
200IlS on this module)
• ASIC scan (JOIlS)
In the best case scenario, the 17S6-0B16E module
has a 2 1 0IlS signal propogation delay at 24V dc in
24°C.
These times are not guaranteed. We list maximum
delay times for each module in the specificatons.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

2-6 Digital 110 Operation in the ControlLogix System

Connections A connection is the data transfer link between a controller and the
device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references, in
this case, the 110 module. There are two types of connections:

• Direct Connections
• Rack Connections

The following sections describe each type of connection. See

Table 2.A on page 2-9 for differences between connection types. The
table also lists the advantages and disadvantages of each type.

Direct Connections

A direct connection is a real-time data transfer link between the

controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration
data references. When module configuration data is downloaded to an
owner-controller, the controller attempts to establish a direct
connection to each of the modules referenced by the data.

If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control

system, the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device
there. When a device's presence is detected there, the controller
automatically sends the configuration data.

If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot, a connection

is made and operation begins. If the configuration data is not
appropriate, the data is rejected and an error message displays in the
software. In this case, the configuration data can be inappropriate for
any of a number of reasons. For example, a module's configuration
data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying
that prevents normal operation.

The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module.

Any break in the connection, such as module faults or removal of the
module from the chassis while under power, causes the controller to
set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module. The
RSLogix 5000 software monitors this data area to annunciate the
modules' failures.

While a Logix5550 controller allows up to 250

bidirectional connections, each individual 1/0
module allows 1 6 bidirectional connections.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Oigital l/O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-7

Rack Connections

When a digital I/O module is located in a remote chassis (with respect

to its owner) , you may select rack optimization or listen-only rack
optimization in the Communications Format field during initial
module configuration. This depends on the bridge module
(1756-CNB) configuration. If the CNB is selected for Listen-Only rack
option, then the 1/0 module only allows the Listen-Only rack option.

A rack connection economizes connection usage between the owner

and digital 1/0 in the remote chassis. Rather than having several direct
connections with individual RPI values, the owner has a single rack
connection with a single RPI value. That RPI value accommodates all
digital I/O modules in the rack connection.

Because rack connections are only applicable in

IMPORTANT
/ . ,
applications that use a remote chassis, you must
configure the Communications Format for both the
remote 1/0 module and the remote l 756-CNB
module.
Make sure you configure both modules for Rack
Optimization. If you choose a different
Communications Format for each, the controller
makes two connections to the same chassis (one for
each format) and the same data travels across
ControlNet.
If you use Rack Optimization for both modules, you
preserve bandwidth and configure your system to
operate more efficiently.

The input (or data echo) information is limited to general faults and
data. No additional status (e.g. diagnostic) is available.

Each controller can only establish 255 connections,

in any combination of direct or rack. In other words,
you can use a rack connection between an owner
controller and multiple remote 1/0 modules while
simultaneously using a direct connection between
that same controller and any other 1/0 modules in
the same remote chassis.

Publication 1756-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

2-8 Digital 110 Operation in the ControlLogix System

In this example. the owner is still communicating with all I/O in the
remote chassis but has used only one connection. The data from all
three modules is sent together simultaneously at the RPI. This option
eliminates the need for three separate connections.

Using a Rack Connection with 110 in a Remote Chassis

Local chassis Remote chassis

r=-\
Owner controller
""'"
Control Net Bridge module Control Net Bridge mo� (@\
r-l �
F -;;; l
\j cl/
o c o
00 B B 6=00 B B B

A �
000

@ � I =I= 0 _I= I =

[ :I �I
�=I= U = N =
\ -I
connectio
p I- T -P
I- p - u -
remote
U
T I= u = � =
T
I
� � @J

ControlNet
i @ 4J02J

Rack connections are only available to digital I/O

modules. Although analog modules can only use
direct connections. the system can make both direct
and rack connections to the same chassis.

Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage

We recommend that you use a rack connection for applications

in which:

• standard digital I/O modules are used.

• non-fused digital output modules are used.
• your owner controller is running Iow an connections.

Do not use a rack connection for diagnostic 110

IM!!ORTANT
modules or fused output modules. Diagnostic and
fused output data will not be transferred over a rack
connection. This defeats the purpose of using those
modules.
Also remember. while a Logix5550 controller allows
up to 250 bidirectional connections. each individual
110 module allows 1 6 bidirectional connections.

Publication 1 756·UM05BC·EN·P · March 2001

 Digital 1/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-9

I
Table 2.A lists the differences between connection types and the
advantages/disadvantages of each.

Table 2.A
Differences Between Direct and Rack Connections

II Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages

I
Direct connections All input and data echo With more data transferring
information is transferred, over Control Net, your
including diagnostic system does not operate as
information and fusing data. efficiently as with rack
connections.

I
Rack connections Connection usage is Input and data echo
economized. The information is limited to
owner-controller has a general faults and data.
single RPI value.

Input Module Operation In traditional I/O systems, controllers poll input modules to obtain
their input status. Digital input modules in the ControlLogix system
are not polled by a controller. Instead, the modules multicast their
data either upon Change of State or periodically. The frequency
depends on the options chosen during configuration and where in the
control system that input module physically resides.

This is called the Producer/Consumer model. The

IM�ORTANT"
input module is the producer of input data and the
controller is the consumer of the data.

An input module's behavior varies depending upon whether it

operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis. The following
sections detail the differences in data transfers between these set-ups.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

2-10 Oigital l/O Operation in the ControlLogix System

Input Modules in When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller,
the following two configuration parameters will affect how and when
a local Chassis an input module multicasts data:

• Requested Packet Interval (RPI)

• Change of State (COS)

Requested Packet Interval (RPI)

This interval specifies the rate at which a module multicasts its data.
The time ranges from 200 microseconds to 750 milliseconds and is
sent to the module with all other configuration parameters. When the
specified time frame elapses, the module will multicast data. This is
also called a cyclic update.

Change of State (COS)

This parameter instructs the module to transfer data whenever a

specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON.

The module COS feature defaults to both ON to OFF

IMPORTANT'
" ,
and OFF to ON enabled.

COS selection occurs on a per-point basis, but all module data is

multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state. COS is more
efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change
occurs.

IMPORTANT' You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you

enable COS. If a change does not occur within the
RPI timeframe, the module will still multicast data at
the rate specified by the RPI.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P· March 2001

 Digital 110 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-11

For example, if an input is changing state consistently every 2 seconds

and the RPI is set at 750mS, the data transfer will look like this:

'- - -+-i--�-+-
250 500 750 1 250 1 500 1750 2250 2500 2750 3250

= RPI multicast 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 4138J

Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program
scan, it is possible for an input to change state during program scan
execution. The point must be "buffered" to prevent this. Copy the
input data from your input tags to another structure and use the data
from there.

To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth, we

recommend you use a larger RPI value if the COS
option is used and the module is located in the same
chassis as its owner.

Input Modules in If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the
owner controller is (I.e. a remote chassis connected via ControINet),
a Remote Chassis the role of the RPI and the module's COS behavior changes slightly
with respect to getting data to the owner.

The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast
data witlhin its own chassis (as described in the previous section) ,
but only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller
will receive it over the network.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 2-12 Digital If0 Operation in the Controllogix System

When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote

chassis, in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within
its own chassis, the RPI also "reserves" a spot in the stream of data
fiowing across the ControlNet network.

The timing of this "reserved" spot may or may not coincide with the
exact value of the RPI, but the control system will guarantee that the
owner-controller will receive data at least as often as the specified
RPI.

Input Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often as RPI

� "'"
o� "'"

�t
Owner controller Control Net Bridge module Control Net Bridge m Input module

�h �e
"
co
C � B B �G..J
co

000 =b 000

� II � iI ��
-I
��
�
ut data mUltic st
OdUle'S chassis at

IQJ lQJ lQJ

Input data at least as often as RPI
l.
I IQJ
I
ControlNet 40947

The "reserved" spot on the network and the module 's RPI are
asynchronous to each other. This means there are Best and Worst Case
scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated
channel data from the module in a networked chassis.

Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario

In the Best Case scenario, the module performs an RPI multicast with
updated channel data just before the "reserved" network slot is made
available. In this case, the remotely located owner receives the data
almost immediately.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN·P . March 2001

 Digital 1/0 Operation in the Controllogix System 2-13

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario

In the Worst Case scenario, the module performs an RPI multicast

just after the "reserved" network slot has passed. In this case, the
owner-controller will not receive data until the next available
network slot.

Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a

remote chassis allows the module to multicast data at
both the RPI rate and when the input changes state.
This helps to reduce the Worst Case time.

Table 2.B summarizes the Best Case and Worst Case scenarios, from
the time an input changes state to the time the owner-controller will
receive the data:

Table 2.B
Best and Worst Case Scenarios For Remote Input Data Transfer

Best case scenario Worst case scenario

COS disabled Backplane/Network Twice the RPI
transfer times « l mS)
cos enabled Backplane/Network Slightly less than the RPI
transfer times « lmS)

When selecting values for the remotely located module's RP], system
throughput is optimized when its RP] value is a power of 2 times the
current NUT running on ControlNet.

For example, Table 2.C shows recommended RP] values for a system
using a NUT of 5mS:

Table 2.C
Recommended RPI Values for System Using NUT of 5mS

NUT=5mS x20 x2' x22 x23 x24 X25 x26 x27

Optimal RPI 5mS 10mS 20mS 40mS BOmS l60mS 320mS 640mS
Values (mS)

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN·P March 2001

.
2-14 Digital liO Operation in the ControlLogix System

Output Module Operation An owner controller sends output data to an output module when
either one of two things occur:

o at the end of every one of its program scans (Iocal chassis only)
and/or
o at the rate specified in the module's RPI

When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis (with

respect to the owner-controller) , the owner-controller sends data to
the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module.
Updates are not performed at the end of the owner-controller's
program scan.

Whenever the module receives data from the controller, it immediately

multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system.
The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data
and multicast back out onto the network. This is called Output Data
Echo. The Output Data Echo also may contain fault and diagnostic
information, depending on the module type.

In this Producer/Consumer model, the output

module is the Consumer of the controller's output
data and the Producer of the data echo.

Output Modules in When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module, you
instruct the owner-controller when to broadcast the output data to the
a Local Chassis module. If the module resides in the same chassis as the
owner-controller, the module receives the data almost immediately
after the owner-controller sent it (backplane transfer times are small) .

Owner con ro��\ I� � pu module

D 'f
D
D
D
D B B
��,
B

�
@

'B' Data sent from owner at the e;

i
every program scan and the RPr

I
l@ lQJ 40949

Depending on the value of the RPI, with respect to the length of the
program scan, the output module can receive and "echo" data
multiple times during one program scan.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Digital 110 Operation in the Controllogix System 2-15

Output Modules in If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of
the owner controller (Le. a remote chassis connected via ControINet) ,
a Remote Chassis the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI
rate specified. Updates are not performed at the end of the
controller's program scan.

In addition, the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes
slightly, with respect to getting data from the owner-controller.

When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote

chassis, in addition to instructing the owner-controller to multicast the
output data within its own chassis, the RPI also "reserves" a spot in
the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network.

The timing of this "reserved" spot may or may not coincide with the
exact value of the RPI, but the control system will guarantee that the
output module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI.

Output Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At least as orten as RPI

� ;'l �
17'!>\ �
Owner controller Control Net Bridge module Control Net Bridge mo ul \ Output

"
.:J �
u 0 8 �t=
B 6.... �
"
[ J
t:..o.....:::: 000 rt 8 000

(!$

l -� I [� �i �
R
Data sent from owner
at module's RPI only
:2 Immediate backPla
transfers to module r-

lS2J � lS2J �
: Output data at least as often as RPI

t
ControlNet 42675

The "reserved" spot on the network and when the controller sends the
output data are asynchronous to each other. This means there are Best
and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive
updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis.

Publication 1756·UM05BC·EN-P . March 2001

2-16 Digital 1/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System

Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario

In the Best Case scenario, the owner-controller sends the output data
just before the "reserved" network slot is made available, In this case,
the remotely located output module receives the data almost
immediately.

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario

In the Worst Case scenario, the owner-controller sends the output data
just after the "reserved" network slot has passed. In this case, the
output module does not receive data until the next available
network slot.

Table 2,0 shows the Best Case and Worst Case times for output data
sent from a controller to reach the output module:

Table 2,D
Best and Worst Case Times for Remote Output Data Transfer

Best case time Worst case ti me

Backplane/Network RPI rate
transfer times « 1 mS)

These Best and Worst Case scenarios indicate the

tMI!ORTANT
time required for output data to transfer from the
owner-controller to the module once the
owner-controller has produced it. They do not
take into account the user program time in the
owner-controller.
The receipt of new data is a function of the length of
the user program and its asynchronous relationship
with the RPI.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 Digital 1/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-17

Listen-Only Mode Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I/O
module (e.g. input data, "echoed" output data, or "echoed" diagnostic
information) even if the controller does not own the module (Le. it
does not have to hold the module's configuration data to listen to the
module) .

During the I/O configuration process, you can specify one of several
'Listen' modes in the Communication Format field. For more
information on Communication Format, see page 6-6.

Choosing a 'Listen' mode option allows the controller and module to

establish communications without the controller sending any
configuration data. In this instance, another controller owns the
module being listened to.

In the Listen-Only mode, controllers will continue to

receive data multicast from the I/O module as long
as the connection between the owner and I/O
module is maintained.
If the connection between owner and module is
broken, the module stops multicasting data and
connections to all 'Listening controllers' are also
broken.

Publication 1756-UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

2-18 Di9itai l/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System

Multiple Owners Because 'Listening controllers' lose their connections to modules

when communications with the owner stop, the ControlLogix system
of Input Modules will allow you to define more than one owner for input modules.

Only input modules can have multiple owners. If

multiple owners are connected to the same input
module, they must maintain identical
configuration for that module.

In the example below, Controller A and Controller B have both been

configured to be the owner of the input module.

Multiple Owners with Identical Configuration Data

(@'ControuerB
,-r
Initial Configuration ------ � Controller A Input ...oI--
Ij Initial Configuration

l �
I ::::r,
Input Module
o :;=F
c :;
D O
J 8
B
c
0
D O
f
l;-
Input Module
Configuration (It (It Configuration

l �1
Data Data
Xxxxx
Xxxxx ��1X�2= Xxxxx
Xxxxx
Xxxxx Xxxxx

!ill IQj
41056

As soon as a controller receives its user program, it will try to establish

a connection with the input module. Whichever controller's
configuration data arrives first establishes a connection. When the
second controller's data arrives, the module compares it to its current
configuration data (the data received and accepted from the first
controller) .

If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the

data sent by the first controller, that connection is also accepted. If any
parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first,
the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an
eITor in the software or programatically via a ladder logic program.

The advantage of multiple owners over a 'Listen mode' connection is

that now either of the controllers can break the connection to the
module and the module will continue to operate and multicast data to
the system because of the connection maintained by the other
controller.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Digital 1/0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2-19

Configuration Changes in You must be careful when changing an input module's configuration
data in a multiple owner scenario. When the configuration data is
an Input Module with changed in one of the owners, for example, Controller A, and sent to
Multiple Owners the module, that configuration data is accepted as the new
configuration for the module. Controller B will continue to listen,
unaware that any changes have been made in the module's behavior.

Multiple Owners with Changed Configuration Data in a Single Controller

Il --Initial Configuration
Initial Configuration ------ �

�= t =r=.�
Controller A Input
+�h
Controller B _

1 8 0r:: 0�
�

Input Module
D C:0 0
; 8 Input Module
'@' "@!

�i
Configuration Configuration
Data
Xxxxx
Zzm
�nA)( �:2= Data
Xxxxx
Xxxxx
Xxxxx Xxxxx

r
IrQJ [QJ
41057
Controller B is unaware of changes made by Controller A

To prevent other owners from receiving p otentially erroneous data,

as described above, the following steps must be followed when
changing a module ' s configuration in a multiple owner scenario
when online:

1. Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software

and apply them.

When you apply new configuration data, the software alerts you
to inhibit the module (recommended if your are using a
multiple controller system) or perform a bumpless
reconfiguration (recommended if your are using a single
controller system) . For a complete explanation of a bumpless
reconfiguration, see page P-2.

Publication 1 7 56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

2-20 Digital 110 Operation in the Controllogix System

2. Repeat step 1 for all owner controllers, making the exact same
changes in all controllers.

3. Disable the Inhibit box in each owner's configuration, if you

enabled this box in step 1 .

If all owner controllers have exactly the same

configuration after you have made changes, all the
controllers will reestablish communication with the
input module.
If multiple controllers have different configuration
after you have made changes, only one controller
(the first one to send changes to the module) will
reestablish communications with the input module.

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • ownership and connections

• d irect connections
• rack connections
• input module operation
• output module operation

Move to Chapter 3, ControlLogix Standard Digital I/O Module

Features.

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 3

Control logix Standard Digital If0

Module Features

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I/O and
features that are specific to various modules.

For information about: See page:

Determining Input Module Compatibility 3-1
Determining Output Module Compatibility 3-2
Using Features Common to Controllogix 3-3
Standard Digital liD Modules
Using Features Specific to Standard Input 3-11
Modules
Using Features Specific to Standard Output 3-12
Modules
Fault and Status Reporting Between Input 3-18
Modules and Controllers
Fault and Status Reporting Between Output 3-19
Modules and Controller
Chapter Summary and What's Next 3-21

Determining Input ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and
detect whether they are ON or OFF.
Module Compatibility
ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON/OFF signals from
user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor­
Typical input devices include:

• proximity switches
• limit switches
• selector switches
• float switches
• pushbutton switches

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

3-2 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module features

When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules, you

must consider:

• the voltage necessary for your application

• whether you need a solid state device
• current leakage
• if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring.

For more information on compatibility of other Allen-Bradley

Company products to ControlLogix input modules, see the I/O
Systems Overview, publication CIG-2. 1 .

Determining Output ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output
devices. Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix
Module Compatibility outputs include:

• motor starters
• solenoids
• indicators

When designing a system:

• make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the

necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation.

• make sure that the surge and continuous current are not
exceeded. Damage to the module could result.

When sizing output loads, check the documentation supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate
the device.

The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the

ControlLogix inputs. The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic
input modules. When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required
for leakage current.

For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor

starters to ControlLogix output modules, see Appendix D.

For more information on compatibility of other Allen-Bradley

Company products to ControlLogix output modules, see the 110
Systems Overview, publication CIG-2. 1 .

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 Controllogix Standard Digital 110 Module features 3·3

Using Features Common to The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard
digital 110 modules:
Controllogix Standard
Digital 1/0 Modules
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)

All ControlLogix 1/0 modules may be inserted and removed from the
chassis while power is applied. This feature allows greater availability
of the overall control system because, while the module is being
removed or inserted, there is no additional disruption to the rest of the
controlled process.

Module Fault Reporting

ControlLogix digital 1/0 modules provide both hardware and software

indication when a module fault has occurred. Each module's LED fault
indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and
include a fault message describing the nature of the fault.

This feature allows you to determine how your module has been
) affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation.

Fully Software Configurable

The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom, easily understood interface

to write configuration. All module features are enabled or disabled
through the 1/0 configuration portion of the software.

You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system
to retrieve

• serial number
• revision information
• catalog number
• vendor identification
• error/fault information
• diagnostic counters.

By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers,

the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 3-4 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1/0 Module Features

Electronic Keying

Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys, electronic keying allows

the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the
various slots of a configured system_

During module configuration, you must choose one of the following

keying options for your 110 module:

• Exact Match
• Compatible Match
• Disable Keying

The options above are described later in this section_

When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I/O

module (e.g. after program download) , the module compares the
following parameters before allowing the connection and
configuration to be accepted:

• Vendor
• Product Type
• Catalog Number
• Major Revision - Change that affects the module's function or
RSLogix 5000 interface
• Minor Revision - Change that does not affects the module's
function or RSLogix 5000 interface

The comparison is made between the keying information present in

the I/O module and the keying information in the controller's
program. This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a
control system with the wrong module in the wrong slot.

Exact Match

All of the parameters listed above must match or the inserted module
will reject a connection to the controller.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module Features 3-5

Compatible Match

The Compatible Match mode allows an I/O module to determine

whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent
from the controller.

With ControlLogix digital I/O modules, the module can emulate older
revisions. The module will accept the configuration if the
configuration's major.minor revision is less than or equal to the
physical module's revision.

For example, if the configuration contains a major.minor revision of

2.7, the module inserted into the slot must have a firmware revision of
2.7 or higher for a connection to be made.

We recommend using Compatible Match whenever

possible . Remember, though, the module will only
work to the level of the configuration.
For example, if a slot is configured for a module with
major.minor revision of 2.7 and you insert a module
with a major.minor revision of 3 . 1 , the module works
at the 2.7 level despite having been previously
upgraded.
If possible, we suggest you make sure configuration
is updated to match the revision levels of all I/O
modules. Failure to do so may not prevent the
application from working but may defeat the
purpose of upgrading your modules' revision levels.

Publication lJS6-UMOS8C-EN-P . March 2001

3-6 Controllogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features

Disable Keying

The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller

regardless of its type.

Be extremely cautious when using the disable

keying option; if used incorrectly, this option can
lead to personal injury or death, property damage
or economic loss.

If keying is disabled, a controller makes a connection with most

modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration. For
example, if a slot is configured for a 1756-IA 1 6I (standard input
module) and a 1756-IB 1 6 (standard input module) is inserted into the
'
slot, the controller established a connection because keying is
disabled.

A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following

conditions exist, even if keying is disabled:

• The slot is configured for one module type (e.g. input module)
and a module of another type (e.g. output module) is inserted in
the slot.

• The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion of
the configuration. For example, if a standard input module is
inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module, the
controller cannot make a connection because the module
cannot accept/process the diagnostic configuration.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module features 3-7

Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and

Schedule Outputs

Controllers generate a 64-bit Coordinated System Time (CST) for their

respective chassis. The CST is a chassis-specific time that is not
synchronized with, or in any way connected to, the time generated
over ControlNet to establish a NUT, as described in Chapter 2.

You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and
timestamp input data with a relative time reference (I.e. the value of
the CST) of when that input data changes state.

Because only one CST value is returned to the

controller when any input point changes state, it is
recommended that you use timestamping on only
one input pOint per module.

limestamping for a Sequence of Events

The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a

particular input module point by times tamping the input data. To
determine a sequence of events, you must:

• Set the input module's communications format to: CST

Timestamped Input Data

• Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence

will occur (Disable COS for all other points on the module)

If you decide to configure multiple input points for

COS, your module generates a unique CST each time
any of those input points change state, as long as the
changes do not occur within 500J.lS of each other.
If multiple input points configured for COS change
state within 500J.lS of each other, a single CST value
is generated for all, making it appear that they
changed at exactly the same time.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN·P . March 2001

 3-8 Controllogix Standard Digital 110 Module Features

Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs

Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled

outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp
occurs, an output pOint will actuate at some configured time in the
future. You can schedule outputs up to 1 6 seconds into the future.

When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs, you

must:

• choose a Communications Format for each input and output

module that allows timestamping. For more information on
choosing a Communications Format, see Chapter 6.

• have a controller in the same rack as both 1/0 modules

• disable Change of State for all input paints on the input module
except the point being timestamped

For scheduled outputs to work most effectively,

remember the following:

• The time to schedule outputs to transition in the

) future must account for any controller, backplane
and network delays .

• The 1/0 modules must reside in the same rack as

the timemaster.

For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic

to use these features, see Appendix B.

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features 3-9

Module Mcyor Revision Considerations with Timestamping

When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of

110 modules, remember the following conditions that may occur
depending on the module's Major Revision:

• If the module has a Major Revision = 1 , it will always return a

positive timestamping value .

• If the module has a Major Revision 2: 2, it will return a negative

timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the
owner-controller and the first Change of State condition occurs.

Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if

the module has been synchronized with the owner-controller and
whether the controller is synchronized with the CST.

For more information on synchronizing owner-controllers and

modules with the CST, see the ControlLogix System User Manual,
publication 1756-UMOO I .

Producer/Consumer Model

By using the Producer/Consumer model, ControlLogix 110 modules

can produce data without having been polled by a controller first. The
modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can
decide to consume it.

For example, an input module produces data and any number of

processors can consume the data at the same time. This eliminates the
need for one processor to send the data to another processor. For a
more detailed explanation of this process, see Chapter 2.

Publication 1 J56-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

3-10 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module Features

LED Status Information

Each ControlLogix digital 1/0 module has an LED indicator on the

front of the module that allows you to check the module health and
operational status of a module. The LED displays vary for each
module.

The following status can be checked with the LED indicators:

• 1/0 status This yellow display indicates the ONIOFF state of

-

the field device.

For the 1756-0ABD and l 756-0ABE modules, the

1/0 status indicator does not illuminate without field
power applied.

• Module status This green display indicates the module's

-

communication status.

• Fault status This display is only found on some modules and

-

indicates the presence or absence of various faults.

• Fuse status -This display is only found on electronically fused

modules and indicates the state of the module's fuse.

For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital 110 modules,

see Chapter 7.

Full Class I Division 2 Compliance

All ControlLogix digital 1/0 modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2

system certification. This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed
in an environment other than only a 100% hazard free.

Modules should not be pulled under power, nor

should a powered RTB be removed, in a Class I
Division 2 environment.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module Feature, 3-11

CE/CSAJUl/FM Agency Approva ls

Any ControlLogix digital 110 modules that have obtained

CE/CSA/ULlFM agency approval are marked as such. Ultimately, all
digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked
accordingly.

Using Features Specific to These features are common to all ControlLogix digital input modules:

Standard Input Modules

Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time

Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways:

• Requested Packet Interval a user defined rate at which the

-

module updates the information sent to its owner controller.

This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer.

• Change of State - configurable feature that, when enabled,

instructs the module to update its owner controller with new
data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to
OFF or OFF to ON. The data will be sent at the RPI rate. By
default, this setting is always enabled for input modules.

For a more detailed explanation of these features, see page 2-10.

Software Configurable Filter Times

ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through

RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules. These
filters improve noise immunity within a signal. A larger filter value
affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules.

For an example of how to set filter times, see pages 6-12.

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN-P . March 2001

3-12 ControlLogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features

Isolated and Non-Isolated Varieties of Modules

ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or non-isolated wiring

options. Some applications require power for the I/O circuits to
originate on separate, isolated, power sources. Because these
conditions require separate commons for each channel, some input
modules use individual isolation, or point-to-point isolation.

Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are

channel-to-channel isolation and no isolation. Your application
determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input
module to use.

Multiple Point Densities

ControlLogix input modules use either 8, 1 6 , or 32 point densities for

greater flexibility in your application.

Using Features Specific to The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard
digital output modules:
Standard Output Modules

Configurable Point-level Output Fault States

Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault

states, either ON, OFF or Last State in case of a communications
failure or program mode.

Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters the

'IMPORTAI\ITi
program mode and all outputs change to the state
configured for the program mode.
For example, if an output module is configured so
that the state of the outputs turn off during program
mode, whenever that module is inhibited, the
outputs will turn off.

Publication 1 J 56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1/0 Module features 3-13

Output Data Echo

During normal operation, when a processor sends an output

command out to the ControlLogix system, the output module that is
targeted for that command will return the commanded state of the
output to the system to verify the module received the command and
will try to execute it.

Other devices can use this broadcast signal (via a listen-only

connection) to determine the desired state of the output without
having to interrogate the owner controller.

Monitor Fault Bits

The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the
outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions. If there is
a problem with the module, the commanded state and the Output
Data Echo may not match.

You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault
conditions. If a fault occurs, the fault bit is set and your program alerts
you to the condition. In this case, the output data echo may not match
the commanded state of the outputs.

If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs

and the Output Data Echo, check your output module for the
following conditions:

• Communications fault
• Connection is inhibited
• Blown fuse - Module will not turn ON output if overload/short
circuit is detected.
• Loss of field power ( l 756-0ASD and 1 756-0ASE only) - Module
will not turn ON output if no AC power is detected.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 3-14 Controllogix Standard Digital 1/0 Module Features

Field Wiring Options

As with input modules, ControlLogix output modules provide isolated

or non-isolated wiring options. 1/0 modules provide point-to-point,
group-to-group, or channel-to-channel wiring isolation. Your specific
application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and
which output module to use.

Although some ControlLogix 1/0 modules provide

non-isolated field side wiring options, each 1/0
module maintains internal electrical isolation
between the system side and field side.

Multiple Point Densities

ControlLogix output modules use either 8, 16, or 32 point densities for

greater flexibility in your application.

Fusing

Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fUSing to

prevent too much current from flowing through the module. This
feature protects the module from electrical damage. Other modules
require external fUSing.

Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software

or through ladder logic running on a controller. For an example of
how to reset an electronic fuse, see page 6-22.

Electronic fuses are also reset through a software

reset or when the output module is power cycled.

Publication 1 7S6·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1/0 Module Features 3-15

The following modules use electronic fusing:

• l 7S6-0ASE
• l 7S6-0B16E
• l 7S6-0BSEI
• l 7S6-0V16E

See Table 3.A to determine what fuse to use in your application.

Table 3.A
Recommended Fuses

Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Supplier

Type Fuse
AC 1 756-0AB1 None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SAN-O Industry
protect outputs 6.3A Corp. (SOC) pin
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Medium lag MT 4-6.3A

1 756-0ABE2, 3 Ves - Fused on a per point basis Electronically

fused
1 756-0A1 61 . 4 . 5 Ves - Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm littlefuse pin
3.15A H2153.15
Slo·Blow
1 500A
Interruption
current
1756-0A 161 1 None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 6.3A MT 4-6.3A
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Medium lag
1 756-0NB None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 6.3A MT 4-6.3A
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Medium lag
DC 1 756-0B86 None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 4A MQ2-4A
(See publication 1492-2.12) Quick acting
1 756-0BBEI 2, 3, 6 Ves - Fused on a per point basis Electronically
fused
1 756.0B16E2, 3, 6 Ves - Fused on a per group basis Electronically
fused
1 756·0B1616, 7 None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 4A MQ2-4A
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Quick acting

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P -March 2001

3-16 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module Features

Table 3.A
Recommended Fuses

Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Supplier

Type Fuse
DC 1 756.08326. 7 None · Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm littelfuse pin
protect outputs SOOmA SP001 .l003 or
(See publication 1 492·2.12) Schurter pin
216.800
1 756·0CS6 None · Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 4A MQ2·4A
(See publication 1 492·2.12) Quick acting
1 756·0HSI6. 7 None · Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 4A MQ2·4A
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Quick acting
1 756.0V16E2. 3. 6 Yes - Fused on a per group basis Electronically
fused
Relay 1 756·0W1617 None - Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 6.3A MT 4·6.3A
(See publication 1 492-2.12) Medium lag
1 756·0XS1 7 None · Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC pin
protect outputs 6.3A MT 4·6.3A
(See publication 1492·2.12) Medium lag
1. For voltages above 132V ac, the Interface Modules [IFM) are not an acceptable means to provideexternal fUSing. A rated termmal block
for the intended application must be used.
2. Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses, circuit breakers, or other code required wiring protection devices.
3. The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions. The
protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel, that channel will limit the
current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out temperature has been reached. All other channels with a NUT of that group will
continue to operate as directed by the module master (CPU, Bridge. etc.)
4. A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of 2 fuses. The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit
conditions. The fuse does not provide overload protection. In the event of an overload on an output channel, it is likely tha t the fuse will
not blow and the output device associated with that channel will be damaged. To provide overload protection for your application, user
supplied fuses should be externally installed.
5. If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module's group, the entire group is turned off.
6. The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources.
7. The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads. In the event of
a short circuit on an output channel, it is likely that the transistor or relay associated with that channel wi!! be damaged and the module
should be replaced or a spare output channel used for the load. The fuse does not provide overload protection. In the event of an
overload on an output channel. it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be
damaged. To provide overload protection for your application, user supplied fuse should be installed externally and properly sZed to
match the individual load characteristics.

Publkation 1 756·UM05BC·EN·P . March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features 3-17

Field Power Loss Detection

The Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the following

standard output module:

• 17S6-0ASE

When field power to the module is lost, or zero crOSS cannot be

detected, a pOint level fault is sent to the controller to identify the
exact point faulted.

Only enable Field Power Loss detection for pOints

that are in use. If this feature is enabled for points
that are not in use, you will receive faults for those
points during operation.

For an example of how to enable Field Power Loss detection, see

page 6-14.

Diagnostic Latch of Information

)
The Diagnostic Latch of Information feature is found on the following
standard output module:

• 17S6-0ASE

Diagnostic Latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set

position once it has been triggered, even i f the error condition causing
the fault to occur disappears.

Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic

Latch service. For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic
latches, see page 6-1 4 .

Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software

IMPcORTANT
� '" ,�
reset or when the I/O module 's power is cycled.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

3-18 Controllogix Standard Digital liD Module Features

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault/status data to any
owner! listening controllers.
Between Input Modules
and Controllers All input modules maintain a Module Fault Word, the highest level of
fault reporting. Some modules also use additional words to indicate
fault conditions, as shown on the next page.

The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a

fault has occurred:

• Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary

-

reporting. It's tag name is Fault. This word is available on all

digital input modules.

All words are 32 bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for
each module's density are used. For example, the 1756-IA16I module
has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits. But, because this is a 16 point
module, only the first 16 bits (bits 0-15) are used in the Module Fault
Word.

Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are
logically ORed into the Module Fault Word. In other words,
depending on the module type, a bit set in the Module Fault Word can
mean multiple things. It can indicate:

• A communications fault - In this case, all 32 bits are set to I ,

regardless of the module's density.

• A field power loss condition - In this case, only the bit (s)
affected is set to 1 .

• A n open wire condition - In this case, only the bit(s) affected is

set to 1 .

The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting

process on ControlLogix digital input modules.

Bit 31 Bit 0
t t
Module Fault Word
All modules II11111111111111111111111II111111
A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault
Word. A Field Power loss or Open Wire condition sets
the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word. 42676

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features 3-19

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault/status data to any
owner/listening controllers.
Between Output Modules
and Controller All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word, the highest level of
fault reporting. Some modules also use additional words to indicate
fault conditions, as shown on the next page.

The folloWing tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a

fault has occurred:

• Module Fault Word - This word provides fault summary

reporting. It's tag name is Fault. This word is available on all
digital output modules.

Fuse Blown Word - This word indicates a point/group fuse

I
•

blown on the module. It's tag name is FuseBlown. This word is

only available on 1 756-0A 16, 1756-0ASE, 1756-0B16E,
1756-0BSEI and 1756-0V16E modules.

For more information on fusing, see page 3-1 4 .

• Field Power Loss Word - This word indicates a loss of field

power to a point on the module. It's tag name is FieldPwrLoss.
This word is only available on 1756-0ASE module.

For more information on field power loss, see page 3-17.

All words are 32 bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for
each module's density are used. For example, the 1 756-0BS module
has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits. But, because the module is an S
point module, only the first S bits (bitsO-7) are used in the Module
Fault Word.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

3-20 ControlLogix Standard Oigital l/O Module Features

Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word, Field Power Loss Word, No Load
Word and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module
Fault Word. In other words, depending on the module type, a bit set
in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things. It can indicate:

• A communications fault - In this case, all 32 bits are set to I ,

regardless of the module's density.

• A fuse blown condition - In this case, only the bit affected is set
to 1 .

• A field power loss condition - In this case, only the bit affected
is set to 1 .

• A no load condition - In this case, only the bit affected is set

to 1 .

• An output verify condition - In this case, only the bit affected is

set to 1 .

The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting

process on ControlLogix digital output modules.

Bit 31 Bit 0
t t
Module Fault Word
All modules I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I III I I 11 I I III III
A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault Word.
A Fuse Blown. Field Power Loss, No Load or Output Verify
condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word.
Group 1 Group 0
Fuse Blown Word I I
point Level
1756-0A8E
1 756·0B8EI
GrouP level
1 756·0A16
1 756·0816E
I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 111 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I I
A blown fuse for any point/group sets the bit for that
1 756·0V16E point/group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the
appropriate bit/bits in the Module Fault Word
Group 1 Group 0
� ,------,
Field Power Loss Word
1 756·0A8E only 11IIII1I111I11III1II11I\II1IIIIII
A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for
1
41457

that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets
the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1/0 Module Features 3-21

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • determining input module compatibility

• determining output module compatibility
• using features common to ControlLogix standard digital
I/O modules
• using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital
input modules
• using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital
output modules

Move to Chapter 4 , ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I/O Module

Features.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

3-22 ControlLogix Standard Digital 110 Module Features

Notes:

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 4

Controllogix D i agnostic Dig ital 1/0

Module Features

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I/O and
features that are specific to various modules.

For information about: See page:

Determining Diagnostic Input Module 4-1
Compatibility
Determining Diagnostic Output Module 4-2
Compatibility
Using Features Common to ControlLogix 4-3
Diagnostic Digital 110 Modules
Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input 4-14
Modules
Using Features Specific to Diagnostic 4-1 7
Output Modules
Fault and Status Reporting Between Input 4-25
Modules and Controliers
Fault and Status Reporting Between Output 4-27
Modules and Controller
Chapter Summary and What's Next 4-29

Determining Diagnostic ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and
detect whether they are ON or OFF.
Input Module Compatibility
ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON/OFF signals from
user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor.
Typical input devices include:

• proximity switches
• limit switches
• selector switches
• float switches
• pushbutton switches

Publication 1 7 56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 4-2 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features

When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules, you

must consider:

• the voltage necessary for your application

• whether you need a solid state device
• current leakage
• if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring_

For more information on compatibility of other Allen-Bradley

Company products to ControlLogix input modules, see the I/O
Systems Overview, publication CIG-2_ L

Determining Diagnostic ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output
devices_ Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix
Output Module outputs include:
Compatibil ity
• motor starters
• solenoids
• indicators

When designing a system:

• make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the

necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation.

• make sure that the surge and continuous current are not
exceeded_ Damage to the module could result.

When sizing output loads, check the documentation supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate
the device_

The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the

ControlLogix inputs. The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic
input modules. When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required
for leakage current.

For more information on the compatibility of motor starters to

ControlLogix output modules, see Appendix D.

For more information on compatibility of other Allen-Bradley

Company products to ControlLogix output modules, see the I/O
Systems Overview, publication CIG-2. L

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4-3

Using Features Gommon to The following features are common to all ControlLogix diagnostic
digital 1/0 modules:
GontrolLogix Diagnostic
Digital 1/0 Modules
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)

All ControlLogix 1/0 diagnostic modules may be inserted and

removed from the chassis while power is applied. This feature allows
greater availability of the overall control system because, while the
module is being removed or inserted, there is no additional disruption
to the rest of the controlled process.

Module Fault Reporting

ControlLogix diagnostic digital 1/0 modules provide both hardware

and software indication when a module fault has occurred. Each
module's LED fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display
this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the
fault.

This feature allows you to determine how your module has been
affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation.

Fully Software Configurable

The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom, easily understood interface

to write configuration. All module features are enabled or disabled
through the I/O configuration portion of the software.

You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system
to retrieve

• serial number
• revision information
• catalog number
• vendor identification
• error/fault information
• diagnostic counters.

By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers,

the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable.

Publicar,on 1 756·UM058C-EN·P · March 1001

 4-4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features

Electronic Keying

Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys, electronic keying allows

the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the
various slots of a configured system.

During module configuration, you must choose one of the following

keying options for your I/O module:

• Exact Match
• Compatible Match
• Disable Keying

The options above are described later in this section.

When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I/O

module (e.g. after program download) , the module compares the
following parameters before alloWing the connection and
configuration to be accepted:

• Vendor
• Product Type
• Catalog Number
• Major Revision
• Minor Revision

The comparison is made between the keying information present in

the I/O module and the keying information in the controller's
program. This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a
control system with the wrong module in the wrong slot.

Exact Match

All of the parameters listed above must match or the inserted module
will reject a connection to the controller.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Contro!Logix Diagnostic Digital I/O Module Features 4-5

Compatible Match

The Compatible Match mode allows an 1/0 module to determine

whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent
from the controlleL

With ControlLogix digital 1/0 modules, the module can emulate older
revisions. The module will accept the configuration if the
configuration's majoLminor revision is less than or equal to the
physical module's revision.

For example, if the configuration contains a majoLminor revision of

2.7, the module inserted into the slot must have minor revision of 2.7
or higher for a connection to be made.

We recommend using Compatible Match whenever

possible. Remember, though, the module will only
work to the level of the configuration.
For example, if a slot is configured of a module with
majoLminor revision of 2.7 and you insert a module
with a majoLminor revision of 3. 1 , the module works
at the 2.7 level despite having been previously
upgraded.
If possible, we suggest you make sure configuration
is updated to match the revision levels of all 1/0
modules. Failure to do so may not prevent the
application from working but may defeat the
purpose of upgrading your modules' revision levels.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 4-6 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital liD Module Features

Disable Keying

The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller

regardless of its type_

Be extremely cautious when using the disable

keying option; if used incorrectly, this option can
lead to personal injury or death, property damage
or economic loss.

If keying is disabled, a controller makes a connection with most

modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration_ For
example, if a slot is configured for a 1 756-IA161 (standard input
module) , and a 1756-IB 1 6 (standard input module) is inserted into the
slot, the controller established a connection because keying is
disabled_

A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following

conditions exist, even if keying is disabled:

) • The slot is configured for one module type (e_g, input module)
and a module of another type (e_g_ output module) is inserted in
the slot

• The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion of
the configuration, For example, if a standard input module is
inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module, the
controller cannot make a connection because the module
cannot accept/process the diagnostic configuration_

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4�7

Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and

Schedule Outputs

Controllers generate a 54-bit Coordinated System Time (CST) for their

respective chassis. The CST is a chassis-specific time that is not
synchronized with, or in any way connected to, the time generated
over ControlNet to establish a NUT, as described in Chapter 2.

You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and
full diagnostic input data with a relative time reference (I.e. the
value of the CST) of when that input data changes state.

Because only one CST value is returned to the

controller when any input pOint changes state, it is
recommended that you use timestamping on only
one input point per module.

Timestamping for a Sequence of Events

The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a

particular input module point by timestamping the input data. To
determine a sequence of events, you must:

• Set the input module's communications format to: Full

diagnostics input data

• Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence

will occur (Disable COS for all other points on the module)

If you decide to configure multiple input points for

COS, your module generates a unique CST each time
any of those input points change state, as long as the
changes do not occur within 500l-lS of each other.
If multiple input points configured for COS change
state within 5001lS of each other, a single CST value
is generated for all, making it appear that they
changed at exactly the same time.

Publicat"lon 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
4-8 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features

Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs

Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the full diagnostics

scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and
a timestamp occurs, an output point will actuate at some configured
time in the future. You can schedule outputs up to 1 6 seconds into the
future.

When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs,

you must:

• choose a Communications Format for each diagnostic input and

diagnostic output module that allows timestamping.
For more information on choosing a Communications Format,
see Chapter 6.

• have a controller in the same rack as both 110 modules

• disable Change of State for all input pOints on the input module
except the point being timestamped

For scheduled outputs to work most effectively,

remember the following:

• The time to schedule outputs to transition in the

future must account for any controller, backplane
and network delays .

• The 110 modules must reside in the same rack as

the timemaster.

For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic

to use these features, see Appendix B.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4-9

Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping

When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic times tamping of

I/O modules, remember the following conditions that may occur
depending on the module's Major Revision:

• If the module has a Major Revision = 1 , it will always return a

positive timestamping value .

• If the module has a Major Revision :::: 2, it will return a negative

timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the
owner-controller and the first Change of State condition occurs.

Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if

the module has been synchronized with the owner-controller and
whether the controller is synchronized with the CST.

For more information on synchronizing owner-controllers and

modules with the CST, see the ControlLogix System User Manual,
publication 1756-UMOOL

Producer/Consumer Model

By using the Producer/Consumer model, ControlLogix I/O modules

can produce data without having been polled by a controller first. The
modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can
decide to consume it.

For example, a diagnostic input module produces data and any

number of processors can consume the data at the same time. This
eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another
processor. For a more detailed explanation of this process, see
Chapter 2.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P . March 2001

4-10 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features

LED Status Information

Each ControlLogix diagnostic digital I/O module has an LED indicator

on the front of the module that allows you to check the module health
and operational status of a module. The LED displays vary for each
module.

The following status can be checked with the LED indicators:

• 110 status This yellow display indicates the ON/OFF state of

-

the field device.

For the 1756-0ASD and 1 756-0ASE modules, the

I/O status indicator does not illuminate without field
power applied.

• Module status - This green display indicates the module's

communication status.

• Fault status This display is only found on some modules and

-

indicates the presence or absence of various faults.

• Fuse status - This display is only found on electronically fused

modules and indicates the state of the module's fuse.

For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital I/O modules,

see Chapter 7.

Full Class I Division 2 Compliance

All ControlLogix digital I/O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2

system certification. This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed
in an environment other than only a 100% hazard free.

Modules should not be pulled under power, nor

should a powered RTB be removed, in a Class I
Division 2 environment.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

.
 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features 4-11

CE/CSAlULlFM Agency Approvals

Any ControlLogix digital I/O modules that have obtained

CE/CSAlULlFM agency approval are marked as such. Ultimately, all
digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked
accordingly.

Diagnostic Latch of Information

Diagnostic Latching allows diagnostic I/O modules to latch a fault in

the set position once it has been triggered, even if the error condition
causing the fault to occur disappears.

Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic

Latch service. For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic
latches, see page 6-14 for diagnostic input modules and page 6-15 for
diagnostic output modules.

Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software

reset or when the I/O module's power is cycled.

Diagnostic Timestamp

Diagnostic I/O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs
or when it clears. This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility
in running applications. Modules use the ControlLogix system clock
from a local controller to generate timestamps.

To use diagnostic timestamps, you must choose the appropriate

Communications Format during initial configuration. For more
information on choosing a Communications Format, see Chapter 6.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 4�12 Contro!loglx Diagnostic Digita! !fO Module Features

8 Point AC/16 Point DC

Diagnostic ControlLogix digital I/O modules provide various grouping

of points on different modules. The S point AC modules and 16 point
DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module
applications.

Point level Fault Reporting

Diagnostic I/O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred
on a pOint-by-point basis. The following fault conditions generate
their own unique fault bits:

Table 4.A
Unique Fault Bits for I/O Points

Input Points Output Points

Conditions Open wire Fuse blown
Setting a Field power loss No load
Fault Bit (1756·IA8D only) Output verify
Field power loss
(1756·0A8D only)
)
Using these bits in tandem with "data echo" and manually performing
a pulse test can help to further isolate the fault.

See Table 4.B for possible diagnostic faults on the 1 756-0ASD

module.

Table 4.B
1756-0A8D Diagnostic Fault Table

ladder Commands the Output to be ON: ladder Commands Output to be OFF: Possible Cause
of Fault:
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to l2
output as OFF. output as OFF' .
2. Fuse Blown bit is set. 2. Pulse Test fails.
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the No load or output is
output as ON. output as OFF. shorted to II
2. Pulse Test fails.2 2. No load bit is set.

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P . March ZOOl

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I/O Module features 4�13

Table 4.B
1756-0ABD Diagnostic Fault Table

Ladder Commands the Output to be ON: Ladder Commands Output to be OFF: Possible Cause
of Fault:
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the ll or l2 are
output as OFf. output as OFF. disconnected or
2. No load shows a Fault. 2. No load bit is set. outside the 47-63Hz
3. field Power loss shows a Fault. 3. Field Power loss bit is set. Frequency range
4. Pulse Test Fails. 4. Pulse Test Fails.
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the Hardware point
output as ON] output as OfF. damageS
2. Output VeriFl bit is set.
2. Pulse Test Fails.

1. It IS not possible to create a fuse blown fault In the OFF state. If a short CirCUit occurs. the output pOint IS turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state
until the point is reset.
2. When pulse test is executed. it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display.
3. The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage.
4. Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit, an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output
is turned OFF.
5. During normal operating conditions, hardware damage should not be possible. An output shorted to l2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault. See
output shorted to l2 as a possible cause.

See Table 4.C for possible diagnostic faults on the 1756-0B16D

module

Table 4.C
1756-0B16D Diagnostic Fault Table

Ladder Commands the Output to be ON: Ladder Commands the Output to be OFF: Possible Cause
of Fault:
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to
output as OFF. output as OFF2 . GND
2. Fuse Blown1 bit is set. 2. Pulse Test fails3
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the One of the Following:
output as ON. output as OFF. 1 . No Load
2. Pulse Test Fails. 2 . No load bit is set. 2 . Output is shorted to
3. Pulse Test passes. DC+
3. No power to the
module
1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 . Output Data Echo returns the state of the Hardware point
output as ON ' . output as OFF. damage6
2. Pulse Test Fails.
2. Output VeriFy5 sets a bit.
1. The electroniC protection of thiS module has been deSigned to proVide protection for the module from short circUlt conditions. The protectIOn IS based on a
thermal cutout principal. In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel. that channel will limit the current within millisecondsafter its
thermal cutout temperature has been reached. Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below
the minimum detect level of 19.2V dc. The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master
(CPU, Bridge, etc.) What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one
channel occurs.
2. It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state. If a short circuit occurs. the output point is turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state
until that point is reset.
3. When pulse test IS executed. it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display.
4. The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage.
5. Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit. an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the
output is turned OFF.
6. During normal operating conditions. hardware damage should not be possible. An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault.
See output shorted to GND as a possible cause.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P . March 2001

 4-14 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features

Using Features Specific to The following features are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic
digital input modules:
Diagnostic Input Modules

Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time

Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways:

• Requested Packet Interval - a user defined rate at which the

module updates the information sent to its owner controller.
This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer.

• Change of State - configurable feature that, when enabled,

instructs the module to update its owner controller with new
data whenever a speCified input point transitions from ON to
OFF or OFF to ON_ The data will be sent at the RPI rate_ The
default setting for this feature is always enabled.

For a more detailed explanation of these features, see page 2-10.

Software Configurable Filter Times

ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through

RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix diagnostic input modules.
These filters improve noise immunity within a signal. A larger filter
value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules.

For an example of how to set filter times, see page 6- 1 4 for diagnostic
input modules.

Isolated and Non-Isolated Varieties of Modules

ControlLogix diagnostic input modules provide isolated or

non-isolated wiring options. Some applications reqUire power for the
1/0 circuits to originate on separate, isolated, power sources. Because
these conditions require separate commons for each channel, some
input modules use individual isolation, or point-to-point isolation.

Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix diagnostic input

modules are channel-to-channel isolation and no isolation. Your
specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary
and which input module to use.
)

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features 4-15

Multiple Point Densities

ControlLogix diagnostic input modules use either 8, 16, or 32 point

densities for greater flexibility in your application.

Open Wire Detection

Open Wire is used to make sure the field wiring is connected to the
module. The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to
function properly.

A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input

device. (See each module's specifications, listed in Chapter 6, for more
details.) The resulting current is then expected to exist when the
input is open.

When an Open Wire condition is detected, a point-level fault is sent to

the controller to identify the exact paint fault. This feature has a
corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the
event of a fault. For more information on these tags, see Appendix A.

) If this feature is enabled for pOints that are not in

use, you will receive faults for those points during
operation.

For an example of how to enable the Open Wire detection diagnostic,

see page 6- 15.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 4�16 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module features

Field Power Loss Detection

Field Power Loss is only found on the 1756-IA8D module.

When field power to the module is lost, a point level fault is sent to
the controller to identify the exact point faulted. Only enable Field
Power Loss detection for pOints that are in use.

This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user
program in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags,
see Appendix A.

If this feature is enabled for pOints that are not in

use, you will receive faults for those points during
operation.

For an example of how to set the Field Power Loss detection

diagnostic, see page 6-14.

Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules

)
If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled, a diagnostic input
module sends new data to the owner controller when one of three
events occurs:

• Requested Packet Interval - a user defined rate at which the

module updates the information sent to its owner controller

• Change of State - configurable feature that, when enabled,

instructs the module to update its owner-controller with new
data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to
OFF or OFF to ON. The transitioned input data is sent with the
next RPI update.

• Diagnostic Change of State - any change in the diagnostics for

a particular input pOint

Publication 1 7 56-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module features 4-17

Although the RPI occurs continuously, this COS feature allows you to
decide whether changes in a module's diagnostic detection should
cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller.

If this feature is enabled, the input module sends new data to the
owner controller at the RPI, on input COS if it is enabled, and if a
diagnostic fault occurs.

If this feature is disabled, real time data is not sent when a diagnostic
fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is
enabled.

Using Features Specific to The following features are common to all ControlLogix diagnostic
digital output modules:
Diagnostic Output Modules

Configurable Point-level Output Fault States

Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault

states, either ON, OFF or Last State in case of a communications
failure or program mode.
)

111[1B0RiA!)Ill' Whenever you inhibit a diagnostic output module, it

enters the program mode and all outputs change to
the state configured for the program mode.
For example, if an output module is configured so
that the state of the outputs turn off during program
mode, whenever that module is inhibited, the
outputs will turn off.

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

4�18 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features

Output Data Echo

During normal operation, when a processor sends an output

command out to the ControlLogix system, the diagnostic output
module that is targeted for that command will return the commanded
state of the output to the system to verify the module received the
command and will try to execute it

Other devices can use this broadcast signal (via a listen-only

connection) to determine the desired state of the output without
having to interrogate the owner controller.

This feature cannot relay to the system that the field-side device
connected to the output module has executed the command. If your
application requires a more detailed response than only
acknowledging the receipt of a command, see the Field Side Output
Verification feature, defined later in this chapter.

Monitor Fault Bits

The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the
outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions. If there is
a problem with the module, the commanded state and the Output
Data Echo may not match.

You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault
conditions. If a fault occurs, the fault bit is set and your program alerts
you to the condition. In this case, the output data echo may not match
the commanded state of the outputs.

If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs

and the Output Data Echo, check your diagnostic output module for
the following conditions:

• Communications fault
• Connection inhibited
• Blown fuse - Module will not turn ON output if overload/short
circuit is detected.
• Loss of field power ( ! 756-0ASD and 1 756-0ASE only) - Module
will not turn ON output if no AC power is detected.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital I/O Module Features 4�19

Field Wiring Options

As with diagnostic input modules, ControlLogix diagnostic output

modules provide isolated or non-isolated wiring options. I/O modules
provide point-to-point, group-to-group, or channel-to-channel wiring
isolation.

Your specific application determines what type of isolation is

necessary and which output module to use.

Although some ControlLogix diagnostic 1/0 modules

provide non-isolated field side wiring options, each
1/0 module maintains internal electrical isolation
between the system side and field side.

Multiple Point Densities

ControlLogix diagnostic output modules use either 8, 1 6, or 32 point

densities for greater flexibility in your application.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

4·20 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital !fO Module Features

Fusing

Diagnostic digital outputs have internal electronics to prevent too

much current from flowing through the module. This feature protects
the module from electrical damage.

Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software

or through ladder logic running on a controller. For an example of
how to reset an electronic fuse. see page 6-22.

Electronic fuses are also reset through a software

reset or when the diagnostic output module is power
cycled.

Table 4.D
Recommended Fuses

Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse

Type
AC 1 756-0ASO 1 . 2 Yes - Fused on a per Electronically fused
point basis
DC 1 756-081 60" .3
2 Yes - Fused on a per Electronically fused
point basis
1. Electronic protection IS not Intended to replace fuses, circuit breakers, or other code required wiring
protection devices.
2. The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short
circuit conditions. The protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. In the event of a short circuit
condition on an output channel, that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out
temperature has been reached_ All other channels will continue to operate as directed by the module master
(CPU, Bridge, etc.)
3. The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short
circuit conditions. The protections is based on a thermal cut-out principle_ In the event of a short circuit
condition on an output channel, that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out
temperature has been reached. Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal
due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19.2V dc. The output channels that are affected
by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master (CPU, Bridge, etc.). What this
means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channelsshould be checked and reset if a short
circuit on one channel occurs.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Contro!Logix Diagnostic Dlgital llO Module Features 4-21

No Load Detection

For each output point, No Load detects the absence of field wiring
or a missing load from each output pOint in the off state only.

The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a Current Sense

optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor. Current flows
through this sensing circuit only when the output is OFF, as shown in
the simplified diagram below.

v+

Current
Sense
Current flow Output Current flow with
with output ON Transistor output OFF

Load

41681

Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification

( 1756-0ASD IOmA & l 756-0B 16D 3mA) . In the ON-state, the
= =

module must be connected to a load which will draw a minimum

current equal to these values.

If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load

current specification, diagnostic output modules are capable of
sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the
output pOint is OFF.

For an example of how to set the No Load detection diagnostic, see

page 6-15.

This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user
program in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags,
see Appendix A.

Publication 1756-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 4-22 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features

Field Side Output Verification

Field Side Output Verification informs the user that logic side
instructions that the module consumes are accurately represented on
the power side of a switching device. In other words, for each output
point, this feature confirms that the output is ON when it is
commanded to be ON.

The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a

command and whether or not the field-side device connected to the
module has executed the command. For example, in applications that
need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor's
instructions, the module samples the field side state and compares it
to the system side state.

This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user
program in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags,
see Appendix A.

If an output cannot be verified, a point level fault is sent to the

controller. For an example of how to enable the Output Verify
diagnostic, see page 6-15.

)
Pulse Test

Pulse Test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can

verify output-circuit functionality without actually changing the state
of the output load device. A short pulse is sent to the targeted output
circuit. The circuit should respond as it would if a real change-of-state
command was issued, but the load device does not transition.

Consider the following when using the Pulse Test:

• Only use the test when the output state does not
transition for long periods of time. Normal
diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are
transitioning regularly .

• When first performing the pulse test, it is

recommended that you verify the load will not
transition. You should be at the actual load while
the test is performed.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4-23

The Pulse Test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of

possible future module conditions. For example. you can use Pulse
Test to:

• detect a blown fuse before it happens.

The Blown Fuse diagnostic (see page 4-20 for a complete

explanation of fusing) can only be used when an output module
is in the ON state. But it would useful to be made aware when
operating conditions for a module may cause a blown fuse.

If you perform a pulse test on the module while the output is in

the OFF state. the output point is commanded to be ON briefly.
as described above. Although no diagnostic bits are set in the
output data echo. the pulse test will report a failure because
conditions when the point is ON indicate a blown fuse condition
may occur (see pages 4-12 & 4-13) .

The Pulse Test does not guarantee a fuse will blow

when the output point turns on. It merely indicates
this condition is possible .

• detect a No Load condition with an output ON.

The No Load diagnostic (see page 4-21 for a complete

explanation) can only detect a fault (i.e. set the No Load bit)
when an output pOint is in the OFF state. But you may find it
useful to be made aware when operating conditions for that
point may reveal a potential No Load condition.

If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the

ON state. the output point is commanded to be OFF briefly. as
described on page 4-22. The pulse test will report a failure
because conditions when the point is OFF indicate the possible
absence of a field device; in this case. though. the No Load bit
will not be set (see pages 4-12 & 4-13) .

The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a

load. It merely indicates this condition is possible.

Pulse Test is a service that needs to be executed from an RSLogix 5000

program or the module properties page. using the pulse test tab and
should be verified with your load to make sure that there are no false
transitions.

For an example of how to perform a Pulse Test using ladder logiC. see
page B-13.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P· March 2001

4·24 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features

Point Level Electronic Fusing

Diagnostic output modules use electronic fusing to protect output

points from the surge of too much current through that point on the
module. If too much current begins to flow through a pOint, the fuse
is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller.

Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software

or through ladder logic running on a controller. This feature has a
corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the
event of a fault. For more information on these tags, see Appendix A.

For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000,

see page 6-22. For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse
using a ladder logic program, see page B- 13.

Electronic fuses are also reset through a software

reset or when the output module is power cycled.

Field Power Loss Detection

This feature is used when field power to the module is lost or zero
cross cannot be detected. A point level fault is sent to the controller to
identify the exact point faulted.

Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points

IMI!ORTANT0
that are in use. If this feature is enabled for points
,, �
"' �

that are not in use, you will receive faults for those
points during operation.

This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user
program in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags,
see Appendix A.

For an example of how to enable the Field Power Loss detection

diagnostic, see page 6-14.

Publication 1756·UM05BC·EN·P . March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4�25

Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules

Using the Diagnostic Change of State feature, a diagnostic output

module sends new data to the owner controller when one of three
events occurs:

• Requested Packet Interval - user-defined interval for

scheduled updates during normal module operation

• Receipt of Output Data - an output module echoes data back

to the owner controller

• Diagnostic Change of State - any change in the diagnostics for

a particular output pOint

Unlike diagnostic input modules, this feature cannot be disabled for

diagnostic output modules. If any of the three events described above
occurs, the output module sends new data to the owner controller.

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogIx diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault/status
data to any owner! listening controllers.
Between Input Modules
)
and Controllers All diagnostic input modules maintain a Module Fault Word, the
highest level of fault reporting. Some modules also use additional
words to indicate fault conditions, as shown on the next page.

The following tags can be examined In ladder logic to indicate when a

fault has occurred:

• Module Fault Word - This word provides fault summary

reporting. It's tag name is Fault. This word is available on all
digital input modules.

• Field Power Loss Word - This word indicates loss of field

power to a group on the module. It's tag name Is FieldPwrLoss.
This word is only available on 1 756-IA8D.

For more information on field power loss, see page 4-16.

• Open Wire Word - This word indicates the loss of a wire from a
point on the module. It's tag name is OpenWire.

For more information on open wire, see page 4-15.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 4-26 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module features

All words are 32 bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for
each module's density are used_ For example, the 1756-IA16I module
has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits_ But, because this is a 16 point
module, only the first 1 6 bits (bits 0-15) are used in the Module Fault
Word.

Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are
logically ORed into the Module Fault Word. In other words,
depending on the module type, a bit set in the Module Fault Word can
mean multiple things. It can indicate:

• A communications fault - In this case, all 32 bits are set to 1 ,

regardless of the module 's density.

• A field power loss condition - In this case, only the bit(s)

affected is set to l .

• A n open wire condition - In this case, only the bit(s) affected is

set to l .

The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting

process on ControlLogix digital input modules.

) Bit 31 Bit 0
t t
Module Fault Word
All modules IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII1II11II 1 1

I t------,
A communications fault sets all bits in the Module
fault Word. A field Power loss or Open Wire condition
sets the appropriate bit in the Module fault Word.
Group 1 Group 0
,----n ,------,

Field Power loss Word

1 756-IA8D only
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII1 IIIIII
A loss of field power sets the bit(s) for that group in
1

the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the

appropriate bit in the Module fault Word

Open Wire Word

I I I I I I I I I I I \ \ \ I \ I I I \ I \ I \ I \ \ \ \ \1\ \ I
An open wire condition on any point sets the bit for
that point in the Open Wire Word and a Iso sets the
appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word
41456

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4�27

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault/status
data to any owner/listening controllers.
Between Output Modules
and Controller All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word, the highest level of
fault reporting. Some modules also use additional words to indicate
fault conditions, as shown on the next page.

The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a

fault has occurred:

• -
Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary
reporting. It 's tag name is Fault. This word is available on all
digital output modules.

• Fuse Blown Word - This word indicates a point/group fuse

blown on the module. It's tag name is FuseBlown.

For more information on fusing, see page 4-20.

• Field Power Loss Word - This word indicates a loss of field

power to a point on the module. It's tag name is FieldPwrLoss.
This word is only available on 1 756-0A8D module.

) For more information on field power loss, see page 4-16.

• N o Load Word - This word indicates a loss of a load from a

point on the module. It's tag name is NoLoad.

For more information on no load conditions, see page 4-2 1 .

• Output Verify Word - This word indicates when a n output is

not performing as commanded by the owner controller. It's tag
name is OutputVerify.

For more information on output verify, see page 4-22.

All words are 32 bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for
each module's density are used. For example, the 1 756-0B8 module
has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits. But, because the module is an 8
point module, only the first 8 bits (bitsO-7) are used in the Module
Fault Word.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

4�28 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features

Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word, Field Power Loss Word, No Load
Word and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module
Fault Word, In other words, depending on the module type, a bit set
in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things, It can indicate:

• A communications fault - In this case, all 32 bits are set to 1 ,

regardless o f the module's density,
• A fuse blown condition - In this case, only the bit affected is set
to 1 .
• A field power loss condition - In this case, only the bit affected
is set to 1 .
• A no load condition - In this case, only the bit affected is set
to 1 .
• An output verify condition - In this case, only the bit affected is
set to 1 .

The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting

process on ControlLogix digital output modules,

Module Fault Word

t t
A communications fault sets a l l bits in the Module Fault Word. •
Muse BIown, Field Power loss, No Load or Output Verify
condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word.
Group 1 Group 0
I I
Fuse Blown Word
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I III I I I I I I I I I
A blown fuse for any point/group sets the bit for that
point/group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the
appropriate bit/bits in the Module Fault Word l
Group l Group 0
,----h �

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I
Field Power Loss Word
1 756-0ABO only
A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for
that point in the Field Power loss Word and also sets
the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word
I
No Load Word
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I
A No load condition for any point sets the bit for
that paint in the No load Word and also sets the
appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word
I
Output Verify Word
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I III
An Output Verify condition for any point sets the bit
41457

for that point in the Output Verify Word and also

sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1/0 Module Features 4·29

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • determining input module compatibility

• determining output module compatibility
• using features common to ControlLogix diagnostic digital I/O
modules
• using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input
modules
• using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output
modules

Move to Chapter 5, Installing the ControlLogix I/O Module.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
4-30 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 110 Module Features

Notes:

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 5

I nsta l l i ng the Control logix 110 Module

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how to install ControlLogix modules. The
following table describes what this chapter contains and its location.

For information about: See page:

Installing the ControlLogix 110 Module 5-1
Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5-2
Connecting Wiring 5-4
Assembling The Removable Terminal 5-7
Block and the Housing
Installing the Removable Terminal Block 5-10
Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5-12
Removing the Module from the Chassis 5-1 3
Chapter Summary and What's Next 5-14

Installing the ControlLogix You can install or remove the module while chassis power is applied.

110 Module
AUENTjON° The module is designed to support Removal and
Insertion Under Power (R1UP) . However, when you
remove or insert an RTB with field-side power
applied, unintended machine motion or loss of
process control can occur. Exercise extreme
caution when using this feature.

1. Align circuit board with top and bottom chassis gUides.

����� Printed Circuit Board

20861-M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 5-2 Installing the ControlLogix I/O Module

2. Slide module into chassis until module tabs 'c1ick'_

Locking Tab

20862·M

Keying the Removable Key the RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the incorrect RTE to
your module_
Terminal Block
When the RTB mounts onto the module, keying positions will match
) up, For example, if you place a U-shaped keying band in position #4
on the module, you cannot place a wedge-shaped tab in #4 on the
RTB or your RTB will not mount on the module_

We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in
the chassis_

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Installing the Controllogix I/O Module 5-3

1. Insert the U -shaped band with the longer side near the
terminals. Push the band onto the module until it snaps into
place.

U-shaped
Keying Band 2D850·M

2 . Key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module

positions. Insert the wedge-shaped tab on the RTB with the
rounded edge first. Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops.

When keying your RTB and module, you must begin

with a wedge-shaped tab in position #6 or i17.

Wedge-shaped
Keying Tab

Module side of RTB

Publication 1756-UM05BC-EN·P - March 2001

5-4 Installing the Controllogix 110 Module

Connecting Wiring You can use an RTB or IFM to connect wiring to you module. If you
are using an RTB, follow the directions below to connect wires to the
RTB. An IFM has been prewired before you received it.
If you are using an IFM to connect wiring to the module, skip this
section and move to page 5-10_

Three Types of RTBs (each RTB comes with housing)

• Cage Clamp - Catalog number 1 7 56-TBCH

• NEMA Clamp - Catalog number 1 756-TBNH
• Spring Clamp - Catalog number 1 756-TBSH or TBS6H

Cage Clamp

1 . Insert the wire into the terminaL

2. Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire.

Strain relief area

o o 20SS9-M

NEMA Clamp

Terminate wires at the screw terminals.

Strain relief area

4020!·M

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Installing the ControlLogix 110 Module 5-5

Spring Clamp

1 . Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB.

2. Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the
screwdriver.

Strain relief area

o 0
20860-M

Recommendations for Wiring Your RTB

Consider the following guidelines when wiring your RTB:

)
• Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up.

• Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB.

• The jumper bar part number is 9773920 1 . Contact your local

Rockwell Automation sales representative to order additional
jumper bars, if necessary.

• Order and use an extended-depth housing (Cat.

No. 1756-TBE) for applications that require heavy gauge wiring.
For more information, see page 5-8.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 5-6 Installing the ControlLogi, I/O Module

Table 5_A lists the page number of the specific wiring diagram for
each ControlLogix 110 module_
Table 5_A
Wiring Connections
Catalog Number: Page for Wiring RTB:
Connections:
1756-IA16 7-2 20 pin
1756-IA161 7-4 36 pin
1756-IABO 7-6 20 pin
1756-1816 7-B 20 pin
1756-18160 7-10 36 pin
1756-18161 7 -12 36 pin
1 756-1832 7-14 36 pin
1756-IC16 7-1 6 20 pin
1756-IH161 7-1 B 36 pin
1756-IM161 7-20 36 pin
1 756-IN16 7-22 20 pin
1 756-IV16 7-24 20 pin
1756-IV32 7-26 36 pin
1756-0A16 7-2B 20 pin
) 1 756-0A161 7-30 36 pin
1 756-0AB 7-32 20 pin
1 756-0ABO 7-34 20 pin
1756-0ABE 7-36 20 pin
1756-08160 7-3B 36 pin
1756-0B16E 7-40 20 pin
1 756-08161 7-42 36 pin
1 756-0B32 7-44 36 pin
1 756-0BB 7-46 20 pin
1756-0BBEI 7-4B 36 pin
1756-0CB 7-50 36 pin
1 756-0HBI 7-52 36 pin
1 756-0NB 7-54 20 pin
1 756-0V16E 7-56 20 pin
1756-0W161 7-5B 36 pin
1756-0XBI 7-60 36 pin

Publication 1756-UM05BC-EN-P - March 2001

 Installing the ControlLogix liD Module 5-7

Assembling The Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring
connections when the RIB is seated on the module.
Terminal Block and the
Housing L Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with
the side edges of the RTB.

/ Housing
�-'"

Groove
Side edge of RTB

Groove

Side edge of RTB

RTB

20&5S-M

) 1 756·TBCH RTB shown for reference

2. Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place.

If additional wire routing space is required for your

IMPORTANT "
application, use extended-depth housing 1 7S6-IBE.
�
� <

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 5·8 Installing the ControlLogix 1/0 Module

Choosing the There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your
ControlLogix digital I/O module.
Extended-Depth Housing
When you order an RTB for your I/O module, you receive a
standard·depth housing with the RTB. If your application uses heavy
gauge wiring, you can order an extended·depth housing. This housing
does not come with an RTB.

You can use one of the following housings:

• standard·depth housing - 1 756·TBNH, ·TBSH, ·TBCH , or

-TBS6H, included with your RTB order

• extended·depth housing · 1 756-TBE, must be ordered

separately

The graphic below shows the difference, in terms of capacity,

between the housing options.

The housings shown are used with a spring clamp

RTB, but the capacity for each remains the same
regardless of RTB type.

)
Standard-Depth Housing Extended.Depth

Maximum Area 336mm

=
2 :·
:�;W�-- MaXimum Area
C) :: = 628mm2
36 · lBAWG wires 40 · 1 4AWG wires
23 . 14AWG wires

The housings maintain the following

maximum areas:
- standard·depth housing maximum area =

336mm 2
- extended·depth housing maximum area =

628mm 2

Publication 1 756·UM05BC·EN·P March 2001

•
 Installing the ControlLoglx 110 Module 5-9

Suggestions for Using the Extended-Depth Housing

Consider the following recommendations when deciding to use an

extended-depth housing on your I/O module. It is recommended you
use the 1 756-TBE when:

o using >36 18AWG wires

• using >23 14AWG wires

Cabinet Size Considerations With the Extended-Depth Housing

When you use an extended-depth housing (1 756-TBE) , the I/O

module depth is increased. The diagram below shows the difference,
in terms of depth, between an I/O module using a standard-depth
housing and one using an extended-depth housing.

�
• 144.73mm
(5.6981n)
12.7mm -.... • 131 .75mm
(0.51n) --- _3.18mm (0.1251n) (5.1871n)

., \

D ° �
-
r---- =
- Rear Surface of
- ___

ControlLogix Chassis
�
f-
Standard·Depth Housing

Extended·Depth Housing ---++-

' - ;::,-- lo 4 1 682

The depth from front of the module to the back of

the chassis is as follows:
- standard-depth housing = 147.91mm (5.823in)
- extended-depth housing = 1 57.43mm (6.1 98in)

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

5-10 Installing the ControlLogix 110 Module

Install ing the Removable Install the RIB onto the module to connect wiring.
Terminal Block
Shock hazard exists_ If the RTB is installed onto the
module while the field-side power is applied, the RTB will
be electrically live. Do not touch the RTB's terminals.
Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury.
The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion
Under Power (RIUP). However, when you remove or
insert an RTB with field-side power applied, unintended
machine motion or loss of process control can occur.
Exercise extreme caution when using this feature. It is
recommended that field-side power be removed before
installing the RTB onto the module_

Before installing the RIB, make certain:

• field-side wiring of the RIB has been completed.
• the RIB housing is snapped into place on the RIB.
• the RIB housing door is closed.
• the locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked.

L Align the top, bottom and left side guides of the RIB with the
guides on the module.

��=:;--t--ttr-- Top guide

Left side guides

Bottom guide
/
20853·M

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Installing the ControlLogix I/O Module 5-11

2_ Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until
the latches snap into place.

locking ta

0-

20SS4-M

3. Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module.

Publication 1 J56·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

5·12 Installing the Controllogix 1/0 Module

Removing the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis, you must first
remove the RTB from the module.
Terminal Block
Shock hazard exists. If the RTB is removed from
the module while the field·side power is applied, the
module will be electrically live. Do not touch the
RTB's terminals. Failure to observe this caution may
cause personal injury.
The RTB is designed to support Removal and
Insertion Under Power (RIUP). However, when you
remove or insert an RTB with field-side power
applied, unintended machine motion or loss of
process control can occur. Exercise extreme
caution when using this feature. It is recommended
that field-side power be removed before removing
the module.

1. Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module.

2. Open the RTB door using the bottom tab.

3. Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the
module.

Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door. A

shock hazard exists,

208S5-M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Installing the ControlLogix liD Module 5-13

Removing the Module 1. Push i n the top and bottom locking tabs_
from the Chassis

Locking tabs

2_ Pull module out of the chassis_

Publication 17S6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

5-14 Installing the ControlLogix I/O Module

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • installing the module.

• keying the removable terminal block and the interface module.
• connecting wiring.
• assembling the removable terminal block and the housing.
• installing the removable terminal block or interface module onto
the module.
• removing the removable terminal block from the module.
• removing the module from the chassis.

Move on to Chapter 6, Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I/O

Modules.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 6

Configuring Your Control logix

D i g ita l 1/0 Modules

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes why you must configure your ControlLogix
digital 1/0 modules and how to configure them for use in the
ControlLogix system.

For information about: See page:

Configuring Your I/O Module 6-2
Overview of the Configuration Process 6-2
Creating a New Module 6-4
Using the Default Configuration 6-10
Altering the Default Configuration 6-10
Configuring a Standard Input Module 6-12
Configuring a Standard Output Module 6-13

')
Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module 6-14
Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module 6-15
Editing Configuration 6-16
Reconfiguring Module Parameters in 6-17
Remote Run Mode
Reconfiguring Module Parameters in 6-18
Program Mode
Configuring 1/0 Modules in a Remote 6-19
Chassis
Input Online Services 6-21
Output Online Services 6-22
Viewing and Changing Module Tags 6-23
Chapter Summary and What's Next 6-24

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 6-2 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules

Configuring Your 1/0 You must configure your module upon installation. The module will
not work until it has been configured.
Module
This chapter focuses on configuring 1/0 modules in
a local chassis. To configure 1/0 modules in a
remote chassis, you must follow all the detailed
procedures with two additional steps. An
explanation of the additional steps is listed at the end
of this chapter.

RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software

Use RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration for your ControlLogix

digital 110 module. You have the option of accepting default
configuration for your module or writing point level configuration
specific to your application.

Both options are explained in detail, including views of software

screens, in this chapter.

)
Overview of the When you use the RSLogix 5000 software to configure a ControlLogix
digital 110 module, you must perform the following steps:
Configuration Process
L Create a new module.

2, Accept the default configuration or change it to specific

configuration for the module.

3_ Edit configuration for a module when changes are needed.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLoglx Digital 110 Modules 6-3

The following diagram shows an overview of the configuration

process.

New Module
lSelect a module
from the list
2.Choose a Major
Revision

ammg creen
Name
Description
Slot number
Click on the Next Button to Comm. format Click on the Finish Button to
Set Specific Configuration Minor revision Use Default Configuration
Keying choice

NEXT
I
I I
I
fiNISH I
1
Series of
,-
Application
-
Specific
Make custom
Screens
configuration --...
choices here
I
I

Configuration complete

�
Pop·up menu
leads to a
Edit a module's _
module's
configuration here configuration
properties

A series of tabs In RSLoglx 5000

provide access to change a 4J058
module's configuration data

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 6-4 Configuring Your Controllogix Digital 1/0 Modules

Creating a New Module After you have started RSLogix 5000 and created a controller, you
must create a new module. The wizard allows you to create a new
module and write configuration_ You can use default configuration or
write specific configuration for your application.

You must be offline when you create a new module

If you are not offline, use this

pull-down menu to go offline

) When you are offline, you must select a new module.

1. Select 1/0 Configuration.

2. Click on the right mouse
button to display the menu.
3. Select New Module

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules 6-5

A screen appears with a list of possible new modules for your

application.

Major Revision
number matches
the label on the
side of your module

1. Select a module ----

2. Click

The new module creation wizard appears.

1 . Enter an optional name

2. Enter an optional description �---

3.Choose a
Communications Format
(A detailed explanation
of this field is provided

If you are I i you are using

Minor Revision default configuration, default configuration,
number matches the click here cI ick here and you are
label on the side of Go to page 6-1 0 finished configuring
your module your module
Go to page 6·10

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

6-6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital If0 Modules

Communications Format

The communications format determines what type of configuration

options are made available, what type of data is transferred between
the module and its owner controller, and what tags are generated
when configuration is complete.

This feature also defines the connection between the controller

writing the configuration and the module itself. The number and type
of choices varies depending on which input module you are using
and whether it is in a local or remote chassis.

When you select a Listen-only Communications

Format, only the General and Connection tabs
appear when you view a module's properties in
RSLogix 5000.

Input Module Formats

The following are possible Communications Format choices for

input modules:

• input data - module returns only general fault and input data

• CST timestamped input data - module returns input data with

the value of the system clock (from its local chassis) when the
input data changed

• Full diagnostic input data module returns input data, the

-

value of the system clock (from its local chassis) when the input
data changed, and diagnostic data (diagnostic modules only)

• Rack optimization - the 1756-CNB module collects all digital

input words in the remote chassis and sends them to the
controller as a single rack image. This connection type limits the
status and diagnostic information available

These additional Communications Format choices are used by

controllers that want to listen to an input module but not own it. The
choices have the same definition as those above:

• Listen only - input data

• Listen only - CST timestamped input data
• Listen only - full diagnostic input data
• Listen only - rack optimization

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Configuring Your Controllogix Digital liO Modules 6-7

For example, the screen below shows the choices available when you
are configuring a 1756-IA 161 module in a local chassis.

Once the module is created, the communications

format cannot be changed. The module must be
deleted and recreated.

Output Module Formats

The following are possible Communications Format choices for

output modules:

As with input modules, the number and type of choices varies

depending on which output module you are using and whether it is in
a local or remote chassis.
)
The following are possible Communications Format choices for output
modules:

• output data - owner controller sends the module only output

data

• CST times tamped fuse data - output data - owner controller

sends the module only output data. Module returns fuse blown
status with the value of the system clock (from its local chassis)
when the fuse was either blown or reset

• - owner controller sends the

Full diagnostic - output data
module only output data. Module returns diagnostic data and a
timestamp of diagnostics

• Scheduled output data - owner controller sends the module

output data and a CST timestamp value

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 6�8 Configuring Your Contro!logix Digita! !f0 Modu!es

• CST times tamped fuse data - scheduled output data - owner

controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp
value. Module returns fuse blown status with the value of the
system clock (from its local chassis) when the fuse was either
blown or reset

• Full diagnostics - scheduled output data - owner controller

sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value.
Module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics

• Rack optimization - owner controller sends all digital output

words to the remote chassis as a single rack image

These additional Communications Format choices are used by

controllers that want to listen to an output module but not own it. The
choices have the same definition as those above.

• Listen only - output data

• Listen only - CST timestamped fuse data - output data
• Listen only - full diagnostics - output data
• Listen only - rack optimization

For example, the screen below shows the choices available when you
) are configuring a l 756-0AS module in a local chassis.

Once the module is created, the communications

format cannot be changed. The module must be
deleted and recreated.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules 6-9

The following table lists the Communications Formats available on

each module:

Table 6.A
Communications Formats

Module: Available Communications Formats:

1 756-IA16, -IA161, IM161, Input data
-18161, -IB16, -IB32, -IC16, CST timestamped input data
-IH161, -IN16, -IV16 Rack optimization
Listen only - input data
Listen only - CST timestamped input data
Listen only - rack optimization
1 756-IABD, -IBl6D Full diagnostics - input data
Listen only - full diagnostics - input data
1 756-0A16, -OABE, -OB16E, CST timestamped fuse data - output data
-OBBEI, -OV16E CST timestamped fuse data - scheduled output data
Listen only - CST timestamped fuse data - output data
1 756-0A161, -OAB, -OB161, Output data
-OB32, -OBB, -OCB, -OHBI, Scheduled output data
-ONB, -OW161, -OXBI Rack optimization
Listen only - output data
Listen only - rack optimization
1756-0ABD, -OB16D Full diagnostics - output data
Full diagnostics - scheduled output data
Listen only - full diagnostics - output data

Electronic Keying

When you write configuration for a module you can choose how
specific the keying must be when a module is inserted into a slot in
the chassis.

For example, the screen below shows the choices available when you
are configuring a 1 756-0AB module.

For a detailed explanation about electronic keying options, see

page 4.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 6-10 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules

j
!

Using the Default If you use the default configuration and click on Finish, you are done_

Configuration

Altering the Default If you want to alter or view the default configuration, click on Next
You will be taken through a series of wizard screens that enable you
Configuration to alter or view the module_

Although each screen maintains importance during online monitoring,

two of the screens that appear during this initial module configuration
process are blank_ They are shown here to maintain the graphical
integrity of RSLogix 5000_ To see these screens in use, see page 8-4_

After the naming page, this screen appears_

Adjust the Requested Packet Interval here

Inhibit the connection to the module here
If you want a Major Fault on the
Controller to occur if there is
connection failure with the 110
) module, click here

Click here to move to the next page

This screen is used during online

monitoring but not initial configuration

Publication 1 JS6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Oigital l/O Modules 6-11

The configuration page appears next. For example, this screen

appears for the 1 756-0AS module. The choices available on the
configuration screen will vary according to the module selected.

Set the state of the outputs in

Program Mode

Communications Failure in
Program Mode
Choose a state for the
outputs jf communications
fail in Program Mode

IMPORTANT: Outputs always go

to Fault mode if communications
fail in Run mode
Click here to parameters you
have configura:! for your module

This screen appears last in the

wizard series of screens. It is
used during online monitoring
but not initial configuration

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 20Gl

6-12 Configuring Your Controllogix Digital 110 Modules

Configuring a Standard The following ControlLogix digital input modules are standard
input modules:
Input Module
• 1756-IA16
• 1756-IA161
• 1756-IB16
• 1 756-IB 1 61
• 1756-IB32
. 1 756-IC I 6
• 1756-IH 161
• 1756-IM161
• 1756-IN 1 6
• 1756-IV16
• 1 756-IV32

The configurable features for a standard input module are:

• Change of State
• Input Filter Times

Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6-4. Use

the following page to configure your standard input module.

Click on the box. to enable the

change of state for a point

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules 6-13

Configuring a Standard The following ControlLogix digital output modules are standard
output modules:
Output Module
• 1756-0A 1 6
• 1756-0A I 6!
• 1756-0AS
• 1756-0ASE
• 1756-0B16E
• 1756-0BI6!
• 1 756-0B32
• 1 756-0BS
• 1 756-0BSE!
• 1756-0CS
• 1 756-0HS!
• 1756-0NS
• 1 756-0WI6!
• 1756-0XS!

The configurable features for a standard output module are:

• Output State in Program Mode
Output State in Fault Mode
) •

• Transition from Program State to Fault State

• Field Power Loss Detection - 1 756-0ASE only
• Diagnostic Latching - 1 756-0ASE only
Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6-4. Use
the following page to configure your standard output module.

Change the Program Mode value here

Change the Fault Mode value here

Enable Field Power Loss here

Choose the state of outputs after a

Communications Failure here

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN-P . March 2001

6-14 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital liD Modules

Configuring a Diagnostic The following ControlLogix digital input modules are diagnostic
input modules:
Input Module
• 1 756-IA8D
• 1756-1B16D

The configurable features for a diagnostic input module are:

• Input Change of State

• Input Filter Times
• Open Wire Detection
• Field Power Loss Detection
• Diagnostic Latching
• Diagnostic Change of State

Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6-4_ Use

the following pages to configure your diagnostic input module_

Enable Change of State here

Enable Open Wire here

Enable Field Power Loss here

Enable Diagnostic Latching here

Enable Change of State for

Diagnostic Transitions here

One diagnostic, Reset Latched Diagnostics, is not used when writing

configuration but is typically accessed during online monitoring. For
more information on how to reset Latched Diagnostics, see page 6-2 1 .

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Configuring Your Controllogix Oigital l/O Modules 6-15

Configuring a Diagnostic The following ControlLogix digital output modules are diagnostic
output modules:
Output Module
• 17S6-0ASD
• 17S6-0B16D

The configurable features for a diagnostic output module are:

• Output State in Program Mode

• Output State in Fault Mode
• Transition from Program State to Fault State
• Field Power Loss Detection - l 7S6-0ASD & 17S6-0ASE only
• No Load' Detection
• Diagnostic Latching
• Output Verify Detection

Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6-4. Use

the following pages to configure your diagnostic output module.

Set the Program Mode value here Field Power

Set the Fault Mode value here
Enable Output Verify here
Enable No load here Diagnostic
here

Choose the state of outputs after

a communications failure here

Publication 1 J56-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

6-16 Configuring YourControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules

Editing Configuration After you have set configuration for a module, you can review and
change your choices. You can change configuration data and
download it to the controller while online. This is called dynamic
reconfiguration.

Your freedom to change some configurable features, though, depends

on whether the controller is in Remote Run Mode or Program Mode.

Although you can change configuration while online,

you must go offiine to add or delete modules from
the project.

The editing process begins on the main page of RSLogix 5000.

1. Select the module.

2. Click on the right mouse
button to display the menu
3. Select Properties

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules 6-17

This screen appears.

Click on the tab of the

page you want to view
or reconfigure

Reconfiguring Module When the controller is in Remote Run Mode, you can change
configurable features that are enabled by the software. If any feature
Parameters in Remote is disabled (greyed out) in Remote Run Mode, change the controller to
Run Mode Program Mode and make the necessary changes.

For example, the following screen shows the configuration page for
the 1 756-0B16D module while it is in Remote Run Mode.

1 .Make the necessary

configuration changes.

In Remote Run Mode, you --­

can change the Fault

Mode setting or the state
of the outputs when a
communications failure
occurs in Program Mode.

the new data and the new data and keep

close the screen the screen open

Publicaflon 1 756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

6-18 Configuring Your Controlloglx Digital 110 Modules

Reconfiguring Module Change the controller from Run Mode to Program Mode before
changing configuration.
Parameters in Program
Mode

Use this pull-down menu to --.....

switch to Program Mode

Make any necessary changes. For example, the RPI can only be
changed in Program Mode and Remote Program Mode.

1 . Update the RPI rate

2. Click here to download Click here to download

the new data and close the new data and keep
the screen the screen open

Before the RPI rate is updated online, RSLogix 5000 will verify your
desired change.

Click here to continue wlth

--­

the RPI change

The RPI has been changed and the new configuration data has been
downloaded to the controller.
After making changes to your module's configuration in Program
Mode, it is recommended that you change the module back to Run
Mode.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 Configuring Your ControlLogix Oigital l/O Modules 6-19

Configuring I/O Modules in ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules ( l 756-CNB or l 756-CNBR)

are required to communicate with 1/0 modules in a remote chassis.
a Remote Chassis
You must configure the communications module in the local chassis
and the remote chassis before adding new 110 modules to the
program.

1 . Configure a communications module for the local chassis. This

module handles communications between the controller chassis
and the remote chassis.

I�-i�����
1 . Select 1/0 Configuration.
2. Click on the right mouse
button to display the menu.
3. Select New Module

2_ Choose a l 756-CNB or I 756-CNBR module and configure it.

For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface

modules, see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation
Instructions, publication 1756-5.32.

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

6·20 Configuring Your Controllogix Digital 1/0 Modules

3. Configure a communications module for the remote chassis.

1. Select the local communications module

2. Click on the right mouse button and
select New Module

4. Choose a 1756·CNB or 1756·CNBR module and configure it.

IMPORTANT: Be aware of the two

Communications Format choices available
for 1 756·CNB modules, For more info"m1ItiDr'-_-i
on the differences between Rack
Optimization and Listen-Only Rack
Optimization, see chapter 2.

For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface

modules, see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation
Instructions, publication 1756·5.32.

Now you can configure the remote 110 modules by adding them to
the remote communications module. Follow the same procedures as
you do for configuring local I/O modules as detailed earlier in this
chapter.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Configuring Your Contro!Logix Digital 110 Modules 6-21

Input Online Services Diagnostic input modules have an additional pages of diagnostic
services. The following diagnostic

• Reset Latched Diagnostics

is not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during
online monitoring.

These screens are accessed through the module's properties.

Reset Latched Diagnostics here

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

6·22 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 110 Modules

Output Onl ine Services Diagnostic output modules have additional pages of diagnostic
services. The following three diagnostics

• Electronic Fuse reset

• Reset Latched Diagnostics
• Pulse Test

are not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during
online monitoring.

These screens are accessed through the module's properties.

Reset Electronic Fuses here

Reset Latched Diagnostics here

Perform Pulse Tests here

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
 Configuring Your ContralLogi, Digital 110 Modules 6-23

Viewing and Changing When you create a module, a set of tags are created by the
ControlLogix system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix
Module Tags 5000. Each configurable feature on your module has a distinct tag that
can be used in the processor's ladder logic.

You can access a module's tags through RSLogix 5000 as

shown below.

1. Select Contraller Tags.

2. Click on the right mouse
button to display the menu.
3. Select Monitor Tags

You can view the tags from here.

Click on the slot number of

the module you want to see

Because the process of viewing and changing a module' s

configuration tags is broader in scope than can be addressed in this
chapter, you must turn to Appendix A for more information and
sample tag collections.

Publication 17S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

6-24 Configuring Your ControlLogix Oigital l/O Modules

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about:

What's Next • configuring ControlLogix digital 1/0 modules

• configuration tags
• editing module configuration

Move on to Chapter 7, Module-Specific Information.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Chapter 7

Modu le-Specific I nformation

What This Chapter Contains This chapter provides module specific information for all ControlLogix
digital modules. The information is separated by module and
includes a list of:

• configurable functions
• wiring diagrams
• LED indicators
• simplified schematics
• surge currents (when applicable)

The following table lists where module-specific information can

be found:

ControlLogix input Modules ControlLogix output Modules

For module: Refer to: For module: Refer to:
1 756-IA16 7-2 1756-0A16 7-28
1 756-IA161 7-4 1 756-0A161 7-30
1756-IABO 7-6 1 756-0AB 7-32
1756-1816 7-B 1 756-0ABO 7-34
1 756-18160 7-10 1 756-0ABE 7-36
1 756-18161 7-12 1756-08160 7-3B
1 756-1832 7-14 1756-0816E 7-40
1756-IC16 7-16 1 756-08161 7-42
1 756-IH161 7-1B 1 756-0832 7-44
1 756-IM161 7-20 1 756-08B 7-46
1 756-IN16 7-22 1 756-08BEI 7-48
1756-IV16 7-24 1 756-0C8 7-50
1756-IV32 7-26 1 756-0H81 7-52
1 756-0NB 7-54
1 756-0V16E 7-56
1 756-0W161 7-5B
1 756-0XBI 7-60

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7M2 Module-Specific Information

1756-IA16 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change 01 State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-1 0

ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: l ms 3-11
ON-OFF: 9ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

IN-l
� IN-O

IN-3
� IN-2

NOTES: 1. A l l terminals with the same

name are connected together on
Grou p O IN-S
� IN-4 GroupO

the module. For example, L2 can Daisy IN-7

� IN-6

--r====l= l2-0
be connected to any terminal chain to
marked l2·0. other RTBs
� l2-0
Z. Do not physically connect more
than two wires to a single RTB
IN-9 � IN-S

�
terminal. When you daisy chain IN-11 IN-l0
from a group to another RTB,

�
Group 1 Group 1
always connect the daisy chain IN-13 IN-12
as shown. Jumper ---+­

�
wire
3. This wiring example shows a IN-1S IN-14
single voltage source.
4_ If separate power sources are l2-1 � l2-1
11
used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage. 0

l2

41)176·M

Simplified schematic LED indicator

f[O��
+SV
IN-O -€l AC INPUT
c::J

{
�
e
b�--�Nv ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ST 8 9 1)111213 1415
0
K
n
10
GND a
Control Bus Display
Interface 31J 38-M .20945
3

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�3

1756-IA16 Specifications
Number of Inputs 16 (S points/common)
Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 105mA @ 5.1V dc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.S8W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 5.SW @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 18.41 8TU/hr
On-State Voltage Range 74·132Vac, 47-53Hz
Nominal lnpul Voltage 120Vac
On-State Current SmA @ 74Vac minimum
13mA @ 1 32V ac maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage 20V
Maximum Off-State Current 2.SmA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 132Vac 10.15k.Q @ 60Hz
Input Delay Time
Off to on Programmable filter: 1 ms & 2ms
Hardware delay lOms maximum plus filter time
On to off Programmable filter: 9ms & 1 Sms
Hardware delay Sms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of State Software configurable
Timestamp of Inputs +/- 200).ls
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Change of State on Inputs Software configurable (Within 200j.ls)
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (lOOJ.lS minimum1750ms maximum)
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (O.8-1NmJ
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756·TBNH or TBSH)l
Environmental Conditions
�
operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140°Fj
Storage emperature -40 to 8SoC (-40 to 18S0Fj
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14 gau e (2mm2) stranded1
3/64 inch l.2mmJ insulation maximum
Category
1 2, 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (Smm) maximum
Agency Certification
[when product is marked)
® Listed Industrial Control Equipment

0
Certified Process Control EqUipment
@" Certified Class 1. Division 2, Group A, B, C,

� Approved Class I, Division 2. Group A. B. C. 0

(€ Marked for all applicable directives

C Marked for all applicable acts

N223

Maxtmum wtre size Wtll reqUIre extended housing . 1756·TBE.

Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1710·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 7-4 Module-Specific Information

1756-IA161 Configurable features

The folloWing table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: 1ms 3-11
ON-OFF: 9ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

�
L2-0 0-- L2-0 IN-O ---Q 0---0 ll-O
Isolated L2-1 IN-1
wiring
L2-2 0--- L2-2 IN-2 --�0---0 Ll-2
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same name are L2-3 IN-3
connected together on the module. L2-4 0--- L2-4 IN-4 �o---o Ll-4
For example, l2 can be connected to
) any terminal marked l2-15.
L2-5
L2-6
IN-5
IN-6
2_ Do not physically connect more than
L2-7 IN-7
two wires to a single RTB terminal.
Jumper bar {Cut to length) L2-8 IN-8
When you use the second L2-15
terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs, L2-9 IN-9 /
�
always connect the daisy chain to the Non-isolated L2-10 IN-10 c
terminal directly connected to the wiring L2-11 IN-11
supply wire as shown. L2-12 IN-12
3. Thejumper bar part number is L2-13 IN-13 ---Q
97739201. Contact your local L2-14 IN-14 �0--4
Rockwell Automation sales L2-15 IN -15 ---Q
representative to order additional L2 0-= L2-15 Not used o
jumper bars, if necessary.
Not used Not used II
4. If separate power sources are f-rL-L,--,e:::I::rl
used, do not exceed the specified
isolation vOltage.
D D 30243·M
Daisy chain to
other RTBs

8)-�=
-=
Simplified schematic LED indicator
+5V
IN-O -0 AC INPUT

i !
I !=-� I k=['
e
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
ST 8 9 ""0 11 12 13 1415 K tl
a
Control Bus Display
Interface 3033B·M 20!H5

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-5

1756-IA 161 Specifications

Number of Inputs 16 (individually isolated)

Module location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 125mA @ 5. W dc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power O.71W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 4.9W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 16.71 BTUlhr
On·State Voltage Range 79·132V ac, 47·63Hz
Nominal Input Voltage 120Vac
On-State Current 5mA@ 79V ac, 47 ·63Hz minimum
15mA @ 132 V ac, 47·63Hz, maximum
Maximum Off·State VOltage 20V ac
Maximum Off-State Current 2.5mA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 132Vac B.BkO @ 60Hz
Input Delay Time
Off to ON Programmable filter: lms & 2ms
Hardware delay lOms maximum piUS filter time
ON to Off Programmable filter: 9ms & l8ms
Hardware delay 8ms maximum plus filter time
fi
Dia nostic Functions
C ange of state Software configurable
Timestamp of inputs +/. 200�s
Maximum Inrush Current 250mA
Cyclic Update lime User selectable (100�s minimum1750ms maximum)
Isolation VOltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for l s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch·pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756·TBCH or TBS6H)1
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140o�
Storage emperature ·40 to 85°C (·40 to 1 B5°�
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14 gauge (2mm') stranded 1
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
1 ', J
Category

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or
�) listed IndustrialControl Equipment

packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment

@.. Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A, S, C, D

� ApJXoved Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C, 0

C€ Marked for all applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

1 MaXimum wire size will reqUire extended houSing ' 1756·TBE.

2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines',

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 7-6 Module-Specific Information

1756-IA8D Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature 's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Conflgurable Filter Times OFF-ON: 1ms 3-1 1
ON-OFF: 9ms
Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4-11
Open Wire Detection Enabled 4-15
Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 4-16
Diagnostic Change of State for Enabled 4-25
Output Modules
Communications Format Full diagnostics - input data 6-6

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES:'_ All terminals with the same name are A

connected together on the module. For
example, l2 can be connected to any
Not used �� � -
L1-0 Loss of Field Power

� �
r-
Daisy
terminal marked L2-D.

) chain to Group 0 L2-0 IN-O Group 0

2_ This wiring example shows a single

g§) �
other RTBs
voltage source. L2-0 IN-1 -Lo--
3. Do not physically connect more than two I
wires to a single RTB terminal. When you
daisy chain from a group to other RTBs,
L2-0 � � IN-2 62kn, 1/2W,

,� �
5% resistor
always connect the daisy chain as shown. Jumper---..
L2-0 IN-3
4. Resistors are not necessary if Wire Off wire " =

diagnostic is not used.

5, If separate power sources are used, do not
L2-1
"
� � IN-4
I
, � ,�
A ",,0--
exceed the specified isolation voltage. L2-1 IN-5 62kO, 1/2W,
5% resistor
Group 1
� �

'�.�
To Determine leakage Resistor L2-1 IN-6
(PIS ", Field side power supply)

� �
S
Ru:AKMaximum '" (PIS Voltage-19V ac)/l .SmA L2-1 IN-J
RlEAKMinimum '" (PIS Voltage-20V ac)/2.5mA
Recommended Values L2-1
'-----
�. � ll �550f Fleld
PIS Voltage RtEAK, 1/2W, 5% L2
mil 0
100V ae+/-l 0%
I
($
110V ac+/·l0% 47kfl
115V ac+/·l0% 4Jkfl
Slkfl
120V ac+/-l0%
L1
40202
Simplified schematic lED indicator
+5V

-0 AC INPUT
c=J-oo- Display
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+5V Control Bus Interface flT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

f----c:J-<-- Display
--
DIAGNOSTIC
GND � Control Bus Interface 3()34()·M 20927-M

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-7

1756·IA8D Specifications

Number of Inputs S (4 points/common)

Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current lOOmA @ S.lV dc & 3m A @ 24Vde
(Total backplane power O.SSW)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 4.5W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 15.35 BTUthr
On-State Voltage Range 79-132V ac, 47·fi3Hz
Nominal Input Voltage 120Vac
On·State Current 74V@ SmAac. 47-63Hz minimum
16mA @ 1 32V ac,47-63Hz maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage 20V
Maximum Off-State Current 2.SmA
Maximum Input B.25kn @ 60Hz
Impedance @ 132V ac
d;
Input Del Time
OFF to N Programmable filter: lms & 2ms
Hardware Delay 10ms maximum piuS filter time
ON to Off Programmable filter: 9ms & 18ms
Hardware Delay 8ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic functions
Open Wire Off state leakage current 1.5mA minimum
loss of Power Transition range 46 to 8SV ac
TIme Stamp of Diagnostics +/- lms
Change of State Software configurable
lime stamp of Inputs +/- 200�s
Maximum Inrush Current 250mA
Cyclic Update Time User Selectable (200]Js minimum/750ms maximum)
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for l s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V de for ls (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-poundS (O.S·l Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH) 1
Env'lronmental Conditions
t
Qperatin Temperature o to 60'C (32 to 140'�
Storage emperature ·40 to 85'C (·40 to 185'�
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14 gau e (2mm9 stranded1
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category ,2,3

Screwdriver Width for RTB 5/16 inch (Smm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or
packaging 'IS marked)
® Listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control EqUipment

@� Certified Class L Division 2, Group A, B, C. D
� Approved Class L Div ision 2, Group A. B. C. D
ICE Marked for all applicable directives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223
,
MaXimum Wife size will require extended hOUSing - 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as d
level instaflation manual.
escr e
ib d in the system

3 Rerer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P· March 2001

7-8 Module-Specific Information

1756-1B16 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Conngurable Filter Times OFF-ON: 1 ms 3-1 1
ON-OFF: l m s
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

� � IN-O

� � IN-2

NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same name

are connected together on the �. � IN-4 Group 0

module. For example, DC COM

can be connected to either ,
� � IN-6

terminal marked GN 0-0.

� � GND-O

� �
2_ Do not physically connect more
than two wires to a single RTB IN-8

�. �
terminal. When you daisy chain
IN-l0
from a group to another RTB,
always connect the daisy chain
as shown. � � IN-12 Group 1
3. This wiring example shows a
single voltage source.
� � IN-14

4. If separate power sources are � � GND-1

used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage. Q
+

DC COM 40177-M

Simplified schematic lED indicator

5V
IN·O -E) DC INPUT

�L>��� 6
���--��T ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DBe
ST 8 9 lJ 11 12131415 K

Control Bus Display

20945-1.1
Interface
30183·1.1

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-9

1756-IB16 Specifications
Number of Inputs 16 (8 points/common)
Module Location 1756 ControlLogi, Chassis
Backplane Current 100mA @ s.W dc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.S6W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) s.l W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 17.39 BTU/hr
On·State Voltage Range 10·31.2V dc
Nominal Input VOltage 24Vdc
On-State Current 2.0mA @ 10V dc minimum
lOmA @ 31.2Vdc maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage SV
Maximum Off-State Current 1 .smA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 31.2Vdc 3.12kQ
Input Delay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: Oms, lms or 2ms
Hardware delay , ms maximum plus filter time
ON to OrF Programmable filter; Oms, lms, 2ms, 9ms or 18ms
Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
�
Chan e of State Software configurable
TIme tamp of Inputs +/- 200!,s
Maximum Inrush Current 250mA
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (lOOflS minimum1750ms maximum)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation VOltage
Group to group 1 00% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2s46V dc for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA clamp) 7-9 inch-pounds (0.8-1Nm)
Module Keying (8ackplane) Software configurable
RT8 Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"F)
Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 1 8S"F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14 gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 1 .2mm) insulation maximum
Category " .3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB S/16 inch (8mm) maximum

ifo-'
Agency Certification
('-.
listed Industrial Control Equipment
(when product is marked) 1,)
0
Certified Process Control Equipment
� Certified Class r. Division 2, Group A. B, C.

� Approved Class 1. Division 2. Group A B, C, 0

«( Marked for all applicable directives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223
1 M81tlmum wire size Will require eKtended housing · 1756·TBE.
2 Use tilis conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual
l Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 756-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

7-10 Module-Specific Information

1 756-1B16D Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter TImes OFF-ON: lms 3-11
ON-OFF: 9ms
Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4-1 1
Open Wire Detection Enabled 4-15
Diagnostic Change of State for Enabled 4-25
Output Modules
Communications Format Full diagnostics input data
- 6-6

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES: ,_ All terminals with the same name Daisy chain to

are connected together on the other RTBs �''i====F
�GND-O IN-O -+-,-o
_-
1
module. For example. DC COM can
Group 0 GND-O IN-l Group 0
be connected to any terminal 15kn, 1/4W
GND-O IN-2
marked GNO-O. 5% resistor
GND-O IN-3
2. Do not physically connect more

< D
than two wires to a single RTB ND-l IN-4
terminal. When you daisy chain GND-l IN-5
Group 1 Group 1
from a group to other RTBs. away GND-l IN-6
connect the daisy chain as shown. GND-l IN-7
3_ This wiring example shows a single Jumper F===r� ND-2 IN-8 -=1----<0-<>""-'
vOltage source. wires GND-2 IN-9
4. ReSistors are not necessary if Wire Group 2 15kn, 1/4W. Group 2
GND-2 IN-l0
Off diagnostic is not used. 5% resistor
GND-2 IN-11
5. If separate power sources are
ND-3 IN-12
used, do not exceed the specified
GND-3 IN-13
isolation voltage.
Group 3 GND-3 Group 3
To Determine leakage Resistor GND-3 IN-l 5-��,,--
(PIS ;:: Field side power supply) GND-3
RlEAKMaximum ", {PIS Voltage-4.6V dc)/l.21mA
Not used
RlEAKMinimum '" {PIS Voltage-SV del/1 .SmA
Recommended Values
PIS Voltage RlEAK 1/4W, 2% +

1lVdc+/-5% 5.23kil
DC COM 4(lZ(l3-M
24V dc +/-5% H.3ki1
- -
Simplified schematic Input +5V LED indicator
IN-D j DC INPUT
-€l
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
<9

GND·O
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ST 8 9 'D1112 '13 1415 � Ba

FLT 8 9 'D 1 1 12131415

DIAGNOSTIC

402(l3·M
30346·M

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P . March 2001

 Module·Specific Information 7-11

1756-IB16D Specifications

Number of Inputs 1 6 (4 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current l S0mA @ S.Wdc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.B4W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) S.SW @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 19.7B BTU/hr
On-State Voltage Range 10-30V dc
Nominal Input VOltage 24Vdc
On·State Current 2mA@ 10V dc minimum
13mA @ 30Vdc maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage SVdc
Minimum Off·State Current 1.SmA per point
Maximum Input 2.31kn
Impedance @ 30V dc
&;
Input Del Time
OFF to N Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms & 2ms
Hardware 1 ms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms, 9ms & 18ms
Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Open wire Off-state leakage current 1.2mA minimum
Time stamp of diagnostics +/- lms
Change of state Software configurable
Timestamp on inputs +/- 200�s
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (200j..t5 minimum1750ms maximum)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V de for 1s (250V ae maximum continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 s (250V ae maximum continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (17S6-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
t
Operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"n
Storage emperature -40 to BS"C (-40 to 1BS"n
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncon�ensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14 gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch l.2mm) insulation maximum
Category
1 '· 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB l/B inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification rUt'
@;
listed Industrial Control Equipment
(when product or packaging is marked) , Certil1ed Process Control Equipment
:+ Certified Class I, Division 2, Group A. B, C, D

� App;oved Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C, D

(( Marked ror all applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

1 MaXimum wire Site Will reqUire extended housmg · 1756·TBE

2 Use this conductor category inrormation for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7S6-UMOSBC-EN-P - March 2001

7-12 Module-Specific Information

1756-1B161 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: 1ms 3-11
ON-OFF: 1 ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

---'-
NOTES: 1. AU terminals with the same name Isolated OC-O(-lo----­ GNO-O IN-O �0--0 DC-O(+}
are connected together on the wiring DC-l (-b -- GNO-1 IN-1 -0 O--O OC-1 (+}
module. For example, DC(·} can be GND-2 IN-2
connected to either terminal GND-3 IN-3
marked GND·15. Source Input wiring GND-4 IN-4 Sink
2. Do not physically connect more DC-5(-} 0--0---'-0--.- GND-S IN-S --0 DC-5(+} Input
- '-'---' +
than two wires to a single RTB DC-6(-} 0-::-0 D-:;:- GND-6 IN-6 --0 DC-6(+} wiring
terminal. When you use the GND-7 IN-7
Jumper bar (Cut to length) t
second GND·15 terminal to daisy GND-B IN-B
chain to other RTBs, always GND-9 IN-9 ---'-
connect the daisy chain as shown. GND-10 IN-10 �

�
3. Each input can be wired in a sink GND-ll IN-l l -o
---'­
or source configuration Non-isolated GND-12 IN-12 �
as shown. wiring GND-13 IN-13 �
4. Thejumper bar part number is GND-14 IN-14 �
97739201 . Contact your local GND-15 IN-1 S -o 0--
DC(-} 0-- GND-1S Not used
Rockwell Automation sales DC(+}

r
representative to order additional Not used f-r'---''-r--T'---'-n Not used
jumper bars,
if necessary.
5. If separate power sources are
used, do not exceed the specified
Daisy chain to o o 30245·M
other RTBs
isolation vOltage.

Simplified schematic LED indicator

SV
-€) DC lNPUT

e
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
ST 8 9 1) 1 1 12 13 1415 K ld

e
ControlBus Display
Interface
30183-M 20945·M

Publication 17S6-UMOSBC-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7M13

1756-IB161 Specifications

Number of Inputs 16 (individually isolated)

Module Location 1 7S6 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 100mA @ S.1 V dc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.S8W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) SW @ 60oC
Thermal D'lssipation 1 7.0S BTUlhr
On-State Voltage Range 1 0-30V dc
Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc
On-State Current 2mA @ lOV dc minimum
lamA @ 30 V dc maximum
Maximum Off-State VOltage SVdc
Maximum Off-State Current lSmA
Max. Input Impedance @ 30V dc 3kQ
Input Delay Time
OFfto ON Programmable fi Iter: Oms, 1 ms Of 2ms
Hardware delay 1 ms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, lms, 2ms. gms or l8ms
Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
Time stamp of inputs +1- 200�s
Maximum Inrush Current 250mA
Cyclic Update TIme User selectable (lOO�s minimum1750ms maximum)

)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (25DV ac max.. continuous voltage)
User side to system side 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (25DV ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 404 inch-pounds (Oo4Nm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature a to 60'C (32 to 140'F)
Storage emperature -40 to 8S'C (-40 to 1 85'F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14 gauge (2mm� stranded1
3/64 inch (1 ,2mm) insulation maximum
1 2, 3
Category

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 /8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or f,yj;) listed industrial Control Equipment

packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment

(@:"> Certified Class L Division 2, Group A. B, C, D

� Approved Class L Division 2, Group A. B. C. D

C€ Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223
1 Maximum wire sIze WIll reqUIre extended housmg . 1756·TBE,
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Raft![ to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7M14 Module-Specific Information

1 756-1B32 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: l ms 3-1 1
ON-OFF: l ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

IN-l IN-O
IN-3 IN-2
IN-5 IN-4
IN-7 IN-6
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same
Group 0 IN-9 IN-8
name are connected
together on the module. For IN-11 IN-l0
example, DC COM can be IN-13 IN-12
Daisy chain to IN-15 IN-14
connected to either terminal
other RTBs
marked GND·l. GND-O GND-O
2. Do not physically connect
IN-17
more than two wires to a IN-19
single RTB terminal. When IN-21 IN-20
you daisy chain to other Jumper IN-23 IN-22
RTBs, always connect the wire Group 1 IN-25 IN-24
daisy chain as shown. IN-27 IN-26
3. This wiring example shows IN-29 IN-28
a single voltage source. IN-31 IN-30
GND-l GND-l
4. If separate power sources
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage.

DC COM
40172-M

Simplified schematic lED indicator

5V
IN·O
-€J DC INPUT
51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1

GND-O ___-I<l-_---l._L-_-'=F---'T
. ST 8 9 6���!�
)-
ST �i � �6 � � �
Control Bus Display
sT � � � � � � 6 �
Interface 30163·M JOOB2-M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7·15

1756-IB32 Specifications

Number of Inputs 32 (16 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 1S0mA @ S.Wdc & 2mA @ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 0.81W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 4.SW @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipaflon 16.37 8TU/hr @ 60'C
On-State Voltage Range 10-31.2V dc
Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc
ON-State Current
@ 10Vdc 2.mA
@ 31.2Vdc S.SmA
Maximum Off-State VOltage SV dc
Maximum Off-State Current l.SmA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 31 .2V de S_67kD.
Input Delay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms or 2ms
Hardware delay lms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms, 2ms, 9ms or 18ms
Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
TIme stamp on inputs +/- 200�s
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Cyclic Update lime User selectable (100J.LS minimum1750ms maximum)
) Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation VOltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
RT8 Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (OANm) maximum
Module Keying (8ackplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"F)
Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 1 8S"F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-l4 gau e (2mm2) stranded'
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
1 2, 3
Category

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) @j;) listed !mlusuial Control Equipment

@" r
Certified Process Control Equipment
Certified Class J, Division 2, G oup A, B, C, 0
� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, 0
C€ Marked far all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1 Maximum wire Size Will require extended housmg . 1756·TBE.

2 Use this conductor category inFormation for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publicat',on 1 7S6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

7-16 Module-Specific Information

1 756-IG16 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Change of State (COS) OFF·ON: Enabled 2·10
ON·OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF·ON: 1 ms 3·1 1
ON·OFF: 1 m s
Communications Format Input data 6·6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module .

..I. -
�8B illi
�
IN·1 IN·O - -<i --L0- -

illi
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same
name are connected f-----L
-o IN·3
� IN·2

� illi
together on the module. For IN·S IN·4
example. DC COM can be Group 0 Group 0

� illi
connected to any terminal IN·7 IN·6
marked GND·1. Daisych ain

� illi
2. Do not physically connect to other
GNO·O GND·O
RTBs ,
Va
more than two wires to a != =

single RTB terminal. When

you daisy chain from a
IN·9
"
� � IN·B t o-

IN·1O
group to another RTB, IN·11
,
g)0 , �
always connect the daisy
chain as shown. Group 1 IN·13
,
� � ,
IN·12 Group 1
3. This wiring example shows
a single voltage source. Jumper •
IN·1 5 � � IN·14

illi §{F)
4. If separate power sources wire
GNO·1 GND·1
are used, do not exceed the '--- -
specified isolation voltage. 0

- I I +
I I
OC COM 40179-M

Simplified schematic lED indicator

+5V
IN·O
-8 DC INPUT
CJ-�'--Ir��� 6
GNO·O
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
ST 8 9 1) 11 12131415 K
[de
Control Bus Display
Interface
30350·M 2094S-M

Publication 17S6·UMOSBC·EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�17

1756-IC16 Specifications

Number of Inputs 1 6 (S points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 100mA @ S. 1 V dc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
[fatal backplane power 0.S8W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) S.2W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 17.73 BTU/hr
On-State Voltage Range 30-SSV dc @ 60·C all channels (Linear derating)
30-60V dc @ SS·C all channels (Linear derating)
Nominal Input Voltage 4SV dc
On-State Current 2mA @ 30V dc minimum
7mA @ 60V dc maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage 10V
Maximum Off-State Current l.SmA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 60V dc S.S7kQ
Input Delay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: Oms, l ms, or 2ms
Hardware delay 1 ms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, l ms, 2ms, 9ms, or l8ms
Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
TIme stamp of inputs ,/- 200�s
Cyclic Update TIme User selectable (200�s minimum1750ms maximum)
'. Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
) Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2S46V dc for ls (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for l s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (O_S-l Nm)
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (1 7S6-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
t
Operatin Temperature o to 60·C (32 to 140·F)
Storage emperature -40 to SS·C (-40 to lBS·n
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14 gauge (2mm� stranded'
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 2. 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB SI16 inch (Smm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or Q1.i::1 listerllndustrial Control Equipment

packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment

(J.. Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C, D

� Approved Class L Division 2, Group A B. C, D

(( Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223
, MaXimumwire 511e WIll reqUire extended housmg . 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 ··Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 17S6-UMOSSC-EN-P - March 2001

 7�18 Module-Specific Information

1 756-I H1 61 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: lms 3-1 1
ON-OFF: lms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

-.L
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same name DC-O(-) 0-- GND-O IN-O -0 0--0 DC-O!+)
are connected together on the
Isolated
GND-l IN-l
module. For example, DC(-) can be wiring GND-2 IN-2
connected to either terminal DC-3(-) 0- GND-3 IN-3 --od'"0--0 DC-3(+)
marked GND-15. GND-4 IN-4
2. 00 not physically connect more GND-5 IN-5
\,
} than two wires to a single RTB GND-6 IN-6
terminal. When you use the DC-7(-) 0- GND-7 IN-7 --od'"0--0 DC-7(+)
second GND-15 terminal to daisy GND-S IN-S
chain to other RTBs, always Jumper bar (Cut to length) t GND-9 IN-9
connect the daisy chain to the GND-l0 IN- 1 0 --------odC

�
terminal directly connected to the GND-l l IN-ll
Non�isolated GND-12 IN-lZ
supply wire as shown.
wiring GND-13 IN-13-------4

�
3. Thejumper bar part number is
97739201. Contact your local GND-14 IN-14
Rockwell Automation sales GND-15 IN-15
representative to order additional DCI-) D-= GND-15 Not used DC(+)
jumper bars, if necessary. Not used Not used

4. If separate power sources are

used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage. Daisy chain to other RTBs
40167-M

Simplified schematic LED indicator

5V
IN-O
-€) DC INPUT
����r---�� a
8a
cp
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
5T B 9 1J 1l1213141S K

ControlBus Display
Interface
30183-M
20945-M

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Module-Specific information 7-19

1756-IH161 Specifications
Number of Inputs 16 (Individually isolated)
Module Location 1755 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 12SmA @ S.lVdc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.71W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) SW @ 50'C
Thermal Dissipation 17.05 BTU/hr
On-State Voltage Range 90-146V dc
Derated as follows 90-146V dc @ 50'C, 12 Channels ON @ same time
90-132V dc @ 55'C, 14 Channels ON @ same time
90-125V dc @ 50'C, 15 Channels ON @ same time
90-145V dc @ 30'C, 15 Channels ON @ sametime
Nominal Input Voltage 125V dc
On-State Current 1 rnA @ 90V dc minimum
3mA @ 146V dc maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage 20Vdc
Maximum Off-State Current 0.8mA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 146V dc 48.6JkD
Input Delay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: Oms, lms or 2ms
Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms, 2ms, 9ms or 18ms
Hardware delay fjms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
Time stamp of inputs +/- 200�s
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Cyclic Update TIme User selectable (200�s minimum1750ms maximum)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 1 00% tested at 2545V dc for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2545V dc for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
�
Operatin Temperature o to 50'C (32 to 140'F)
Storage emperature -40 to BS'C (-40 to 1B5'F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14 gauge (2mm1) stranded1
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 1. 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB l/B inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or r�i,) Uste<l lndustrial Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
packaging is marked)
@-- Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C, D

� Approved Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C. D

(€ Marked for all applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

Maximum Wire Sile will reqUire extended housmg - 1755·TBE.

Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer 10 publication 1770·4.1 ·'Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 7-20 Module·Specific Information

1756-IM161 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports. the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF·ON: Enabled 2·10
ON·OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF·ON: 1ms 3·1 1
ON·OFF: 1ms
Communications Format Input data 6·6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

-.L
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same L2·0 0-- L2·0 IN·O --0 o--o L 1·0
name are connected together Isolated L2.1 IN.1
on the module. For example, wiring L2.2 0-- L2·2 IN·2 �o--oL 1.2
l2 can be connected to any L2·3 IN·3
terminal marked l2·15. L2·4 0-- L2·4 IN·4 ---<2..L
O--OL1.4
) 2. Do not physically connect L2·5 IN·5
more than two wires to a L2·6 IN·6
single RTB terminal. When L2·7 IN·7

j� �n� ;g1--::
Jumper bar (Cut to length) L2-8 IN-8
you use the second L2-15
terminal to daisy chain to
other RTBs, always connect l
the daisy chain as shown.
Non.isolated
3. Thejumper bar part number
wiring L2·13 IN·13--o
is 97739201 . Contact your
L2·14 IN·14
local Rockwell Automation
L2·15 IN.15 �0---.
sales representative to order L2 <>---= L2·15 Not used

C
additionaljumper bars,
ot used 1T'=,-+....t,rI Not used
if necessary.
L1
4. If separate power sources are
used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage. Daisy chain to other RTBs
·
4(}16B M

Simplified schematic LED indicator

+5V

11 !�r9r
IN·O -E) AC INPUT

c::? u.w
i
Cl
�---�.rvv ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
K
ST 8 9 11 11 12 131415
n
Ihl
(l
Control Bus Display
Interface
30338·M 20941·M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7R21

1756-IM161 Specifications

Number of Inputs 16 (Individually isolated)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 100mA @ 5.lV dc & 3mA @ 24Vdc
[Total backplane power 0.58W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 5.8W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 19.78 BTu/hr
On-State Voltage Range 159-265V ac, 47·63Hz @ 30°C All Channels ON
159-265V ac, 47-63I1z @ 40°C 8 Points ON
159-253V ac, 47-63Hz @ WC All Channels ON
159-242Vac, 47-63Hz @ 6D°C AIl Channels ON
Nominal Input Voltage 240Vac
On-State Current SmA @ 159V ae, 60Hz minimum
13mA @ 26SV ac, 60Hz maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage 40Vac
Maximum Off-State Current 2.SmA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 265V ac 20.3Bkn @ 60Hz
Input Oelay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: lms or 2ms
Hardware delay lOms maximum plus filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: 9ms or lBms
Hardware delay Bms maximum and filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
TIme stamp of inputs +1- 2oo�s
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (200�s minimum1750ms maximum)
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1 s (26SV ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (265V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)1
Environmental Conditions
�
Operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140o�
Storage emperature -40 to B5°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-l4 gauge (2mm1) stranded1
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 1, J
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or IllY listed Industrial Control Equipment

packaging is marked) Certified Process Control EqUipment

@� Certified Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D

� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D

C€ Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223
,
MaXimum wire size Will require extended IlOUSlng - 17S6-TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
J Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automatlon Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7·22 Module-Specific Information

1 756-IN16 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF·ON: Enabled 2·10
ON·OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF·ON: 1 ms 3-1 1
ON·OFF: lms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

-.-L
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same
name are connected together
IN-l
� IN-O -r--<>
II
on the module. For example,
L2 can be connected to any
IN-3
� IN-2
-+--0&
terminal marked L2·0.
Z. Do not physically connect
L2 Group 0
IN-5
� IN-4
Group 0

more than two wires to a

IN-7
� IN-6

�
single RTB terminal. When
l2-0 l2·0
you daisy chain from a group

�
to another RTB. always
IN-9 IN-B
connect the daisy chain
as shown.
3. This wiring example shows a Jumper -----+­
IN-11
� IN-l0

single voltage source. wire Group 1 IN-13

� IN-12 Group 1

�
4. If separate power sources
are used, do not exceed the IN-15 IN-14

-'====:::j� �
specified isolation voltage.
Daisy chain ...... L2·1 l2-1
to other
RTBs Q

401 80·M

Simplified schematic LED indicator

IN·O +5V

?--N'v�I"---N'v�!J:--
-' ;:I:: --,J-L
l I¥---,-,
....-L-.'=I ::::c �l,
-8 AC INPUT

�_.J.-I-.... II � ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
6
n
..J bl
�
ST 6 9 "'011 12131415 K
_ GND
Control Bus Display
e
Interface
30339-1.1 2094 1 -M

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
 Module-Specific Information 7-23

1756-IN16 Specifications

Number of Inputs 16 (8 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 100mA @ S.1Vdc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.S6W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) S.l W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 17.39 BTU/hr
On-State Voltage Range 1O-30V ac. 47-63Hz
Nominal Input Voltage 24Vac
On-State Current SmA@ 10V ae, 60Hz minimum
1.2mA @ 30V ac, 60Hz maximum
Maximum Off·State VOltage SV
Maximum Off-State Current 2.7SmA
Maximum Input 2.SkQ @ 60Hz
Impedance @ 30V ac
Input Delay Time
Off to on Programmable filter: Oms, lms or 2ms
Hardware delay lOms maximum plus filter time
On to off Programmable filter: gms or l 8ms
Hardware delay lOms maximum pIus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
Time stamp of inputs +/- 200�s
Max. Inrush Current 2S0mA
Cyclic Update Time User Selectable (200�s minimum17S0ms maximum)
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V de for 15 (250V ae max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software' configurable
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (0.8-1 Nm)
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (17S6-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 1 40"F)
Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 18S"F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14 gauge (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch (l.2mm) insulation maximum
Category
1 ', 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5116 inch (Bmm) maximum
Agency Certification
(�i)
�
listed industrial Control Equipment
(when product or
packagin Certified Process Control Equipment
is marked @.. Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A B, C. 0
� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A, B, C, D

(( Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223
1 MaXimum wire SI2e Will reqUIre extended housmg - 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7S6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

7-24 Module-Specific Information

1756-IV16 Configurable Features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Change of Slale (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filler Times OFF-ON: l ms 3-11
ON-OFF: l ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

JOO � IN·O

rlOO � IN·2
Group 0

l8l0 � IN·4

� � I N·6

� � OC·O +

�- � IN·8

� � IN·lO

� � I N-12
Group 1

� � IN-14

� � OC·l +

Q
+ - OCCOM 42552

Simplified schematic LED indicator

5V
OC·O+ -8 DC INPUT
<3
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
ST 8 9 U 11 12 U 1415 K
Be
ControlBus Display
Z094S-M
Interface
42674

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7M25

I 1756-IV16 Specifications

Number of Inputs 1 6 (8 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 1l0mA @ S.lV dc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.61W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) S.41W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 18.47 BTU/hr
On·State Voltage Range 1 0·30V dc
Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc
On-State Current 2.0mA @ 10Vdc minimum
lOmA @ 30Vdc maximum
Maximum Off-State Voltage SV
Maximum Off-State Current 1 .smA
Maximum Input Impedance 3.2kQ
@ 30Vdc
Input Delay Time
OFF to ON Programmable filter: Oms, lms or 2ms
Hardware delay , ms maximum pius filter time
ON to OFF Programmable filter: Oms, 1 ms, 2ms, 9ms or lams
Hardware delay 2ms maximum pius filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of State Software configurable
TImestamp of Inputs +/- 20Cfts
Maximum Inrush Current 2S0mA
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (1 OO).l.S minimum1750ms maximum)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation VOltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2S46V dc for l s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for l s (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA clamp) 7-9 inch·pounds (0.8-1Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
t
QPeratin Temperature o to 60'C (32 to 140'f)
Storage emperature -40 to 8S'C (-40 to 1 8s'F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 1
22-14 gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category ,2, 3

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (8mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product is marked) (\ill listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control Equipment

�<> Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A, 8, C, D

� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A. B, C, 0

(( Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1 -
MaXimum wire size will require extended housmg 17S6-TBE.
Z Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 " Industria! Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7s6·UMOs8C-EN·P - March 2001

7�26 Module-Specific Information

1 756-IV32 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Change of State (COS) OFF-ON: Enabled 2-10
ON-OFF: Enabled
Software Configurable Filter Times OFF-ON: lms 3-11
ON-OFF: l ms
Communications Format Input data 6-6

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

IN-O
IN-2 l
IN-4
IN-6
Group a IN-8 Group 0
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same IN-l0
name are connected IN-l2
together on the module. For Daisy chain to
IN-14
example, DC COM can be other RTBs
DC-l(+)
connected to either terminal
IN-16
marked GND-l.
IN-18
2. 00 not physically connect IN-20
more than two wires to a Jumper IN-22
single RTB terminal. When wire Group 1 Group 1
IN-24
you daisy chain to other
IN-26
RTBs, always connect the
IN-28
daisy chain as shown.
IN-30
3. This wiring example shows DC-l(+)
a single voltage source.
4. If separate power sources
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation vOltage. +

DC COM
42573

Simplified schematic LED indicator

5V
DC-a, -E) DC INPUT
c:::--<>-�
:r-I>II ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ST 8 96n�!�
ST �� � !� � � �
IN-O
ControlSus Display
ST
�� �n �� �
Interface 42B42-M 30082·M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-27

1756-IV32 Specifications

Number of Inputs 32 (16 points/common)

Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 120mA @ S.Wdc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.66W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 4.1 W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 14 BTU/hr @ 60°C
On-State VOltage Range 1 0-30V dc
Nominal Input VOltage 24V dc
ON-State Current
@ 1 0V dc 2mA
@ 30Vdc 3.SmA
Maximum Off-State Voltage SV dc
Maximum Off-State Current l.smA
Maximum Input Impedance @ 30V dc B.6kQ
Input Delay Time
Ofr to ON Programmable filter: Oms, lms or 2ms
Hardware delay lms maximum plus filter time
ON to Off Programmable filter: Oms, l ms, 2ms, 9ms or l8ms
Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time
Diagnostic Functions
Change of state Software configurable
TImestamp on inputs +/- 200�s
Short/Inrush Current 250mA peak (decaying to <37% in 22ms, without activation)
Cyclic Update Time User selectable (100�s minimum17S0ms maximum)
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 15
(250V ac max. continuous voltage between groups)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 15
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 404 inch-pounds (Oo4Nm) maximum
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User-defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB (17S6-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"�
Storage emperature -40 to BS"C (-40 to 1 BS"�
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14 gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 12mm) insulation maximum
1 2. 3
Category

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB l/B inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) ® listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control Equipment

@. Certified Class I, Division 2. Group A. R G, D

12 Approved Class L Division 2. Group A B, C, 0

CE Marked ror all applicable directives

0 Marked ror all applicable acts

N223
,
MaXimum wire Size Will require extended houslIlg • 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1710-4.1 Ulndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 17S6-UMOSBC-EN-P - March 2001

 7�28 Module-Specific Information

1756-0A16 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6-6
data - output data
Program Mode Off 6-1 1
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

OUT-1 � OUT-O

OUT-3
� OUT-2

�
NOTES: 1. Do not physically connect Group 0 Group O
OUT-S OUT-4
more than two wires to a

�
single RTB terminal. OUT-7 OUT-6
When you daisy chain Daisy chain
) from a group to other
RTBs, always connect the
to other
RTBs
ll-O
� L2-0

daisy chain as shown.

2. This wiring example
OUT-9 � OUT-S

shows a single voltage OUT- 1 1

� OUT-10

�
source.
Group 1 Group 1
3. If separate power
OUT-13 OUT-12

�
sources are used, do not Jumper
OUT-1S OUT-14
exceed the specified wire
isolation voltage.
L1-1 � L2-1

0 L2

40175·M

Simplified schematic ll·0 Surge Current Chart LED indicator

G> AC OUTPUT
(Fused per group) (3

j:;�
Surge Per group 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1
20A -j- -, on

cl i
______
FUSE .

c Per group 5T 8 9 'Xl l' 1ZU 14 15 K ld

� SA +-----��--l
B 2A t-I- ��� FUSE I (l
OUj·O
J
______

O.SA t
� I �
____

Control Bus Interface

o 43ms
30341·M Time 40SS3·M 404S8·M

Publication 1 756-UM05SC·EN-P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 1�29

1756·0A16 Specifications
Number of Outputs 16 18 points/common)
Module location 1756 L.ontrolloglx Chassis
.
Backplane L.urrent 400mA @ S.1Vdc& 2mA @ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 2.1W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) S.SW @ 60'C
�ermal uiSSlpation 2 .1 1 � I U/hr
uutput Voltage Range 74-265Vac, 47·63Hz
Vutpu� C�rrent Hatmg
Per Point O.SA maximum @ 60"C
Per Group 2A maximum@ 60"e
Per Module 4A maximum @ 60·e
::,urge �urrent
Per Point SA for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60·C
Per Group 15A for 43ms each. repeatable every 25 @ 600e
Minimum load urrent lOrnA per point
Maximum un-::,tate Voltage urop l.,V@ O.OA
5.7V @ load current < SOmA
Max. uff-::,tate leakage L.urrent 3mA per point
Lommutatmg Voltage 4V/�s ror 10ad"'VmA
O.2V1�s for loads<50mA1
Output U�lay lime
. ON
OFF to 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 11ms@ 50Hz
ON to OFF 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 11ms@ 50Hz
ulagnostlc �unctions
Fuse Blown 1 Fuse and indicator/group
Time stamp of diagnostics t/-1ms
?�h eduled Uutputs ynchronlzatlon within 16./s maximum, reference to the C::' I
Hold last :::.tate, N or a t luFF is the default
.
Configurable tau!t tates per Point
L"onfigurable .)otates in rrogram Mode per Point I Hold last 'tate. ON or Off lUff is the default)
Maximum Inhibit Voltage I Lero crossing bOY peak
�1.?chanicaI!X !USe�lgroup
) �using
I 3.15A @ 250V ac slow blow
1500A interruption current
littelfuse pIn H2153.15
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (265V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 1 00% tested at 2546V dc for 1 5 (265V ac max. continuous voltage)
,<I" Screw IOrque INtMA) J-9 inch·poun" IO.'-1Nml
Mooule Keying {tjackplane :::'0 tware configurable
t ( l ll Keying User defined mechanical keymg
�Ield wifing Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH)2
tnvlronmenta! ConditIOns
Operating Temperature o to 60'C [32 to 1 40'�
Storage Temperature -40 to 8S'C [-40 to 18S'F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
L.onductors Wire :::.ize 22-14-gauge (2mm2) stranded 2
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
1 3,4
Category
�crewdrjver Blade Width for K I B 5/16 inch amm maximum
�genc� �erti�!catlon
_
(When product or packaging @j) Listed Industria! Control EqUipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
is marked)
@,. Certified Class 1. Division 2, Group A. B, C. 0
� Approved Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C, 0
C� Marked for all applicable directives

� Marked for aU applicable acts

, The commutatmg dV/dter the output voltage (OUTPUT to L2) should not exceed O.2V1J.1s for loads under SOmA. The commutatmg dv/dt rating of the
module for loads 50·500mA (OUTPUT TO l2) is 4V/IlS maximum. If the commutating dv/dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded, the TRIAC could latch on. If
the commutating <lv/dt rating is exceeded in the lO·SOmA range, a resistor may be addedacross the output and LZ. The purpose of this resistor is to
increase the total outputcurrent to SOmA (INIR). At 50mA and above, tile module has a higher commutatingdv/dt rating. When adding a resistor for
mthe output to lZ. be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate (p=(V'·2)1R). If Ihecommutaling dv/dt rating is exceeded in the 50·S00mA
range, the II AC waveform could be at fault. Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid. void jf any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections.
2 Maximum wire size wi!! require extended housing ' 1756·TBE.
3 Use this conductor categocy information for p!anning conductor routing as described in tile system
level installation manual.
4 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7�30 Module·Speciflc Information

1756-0A161 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports. the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format Oulpul dala 6·6
Program Mode Off 6·11
Communications failure in Disabled 6·11
Program Mode
Faull Mode Off 6·11

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

Isolated wiring
ll-0 0>---- l1·0 OUT·O ----.!\r--o l2·0
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same l1·1 OUT·l
name are connected together
ll·2 0>---- ll·2 OUT·2 ----.!\r--o l2·2
on the module. For example, L1
ll·3 OUT·3
OUT·4 --------J\r-- l2·4
can be connected to either
l1·4 0--- l1·4
terminal marked Ll-15.
l1·5 OUT·5
2. Do not physically connect more l1-6 OUT·6
than two wires to a single RTB

1
ll·) OUT·)
terminal. When you use the
Jumper bar (Cut to le 9thl l1·8 OUT·8
second L1·15 terminal to daisy
ll·9 OUT·9
chain to other RTBs, always
ll·10 OUT·l0
connect the daisy chain
OUT-l1 �

�
Non-isolated ll · 1 1
as shown.

-4-
r
wiring ll·12 OUT·12
3. Thejumper bar part number ll·13 OUT·13
is 97739201. Contact your
ll·14 OUT·14
local Rockwell Automation
l1·15 OUT·15
sales representative to order
ll O ll-15 Not used
additional jumper bars,
if necessary. Not used Not used
f,..l.-',--,-L..L,j l2
4. !f separate power sources are
used, do not exceed the "-
specified isolation vOltage. Daisy chain to
olher RTBs
D D 30244

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

+5V 11·0 20A G- AC OUTPUT

"
<9
'" ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
�
u
" ST 8 9 XI l 1 12 U 1415 K id
OUT·O 2A
Continuous @ 30°C e
L...J
Continuous @ 60"C
lA

0 4 3ms
41161·M Time 40847-M 40459·M

Publication 1)56·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Module·Speciflc Information 7-31

1756-0A161 Specifications
Number of Outputs 16 (individually isolated)
Module Location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 300mA @ 5.1 V dc & 2.5mA @ 24Vdc
[rota I backplane power 1.60W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) 5.5W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 18.76 8TU/hr
Output Voltage Range 74-265Vac, 47·63Hz
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ 30·C & 1 A max. @ 6aoC (linear derating)
Per Module SA max. @ 30·C & 4A max. @ 60°C (linearderating)
Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60·C
Minimum Load Current lOmA per paint
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop l.5V peak @ 2A & 6V peak @ load current<50mA
Maximum Off-State leakage Current 3mA per point
Commutating Voltage 4VI�s for loads>50mA
O.2V1�s for 10ads<SOmA1
�
Output Del TIme
OFF to 0 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 1 1 ms @ 50Hz
ON to OFF 9.3ms@ 60Hz; 1 1 ms @ 50Hz
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States/ Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 50V peak
Fusing Not protected - Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs
(See publication 1492-2.12)
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 second (250V ac maximum continuous voltage)
User side to system side 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 second (250V ac maximum continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (0.4Nm) maximum
Module Keying (Backplane) SoFtware conflgurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)2
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"�
Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to l8S"F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size p,
22-1 4-gau e (2mm2) stranded2
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 13 4
,

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) 1:1&' Listed Industria! Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
@:� Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A. B. C, 0
� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A, B. C, 0
(£ Marked for aU applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1 The commutatll1g dv/dt of the output voltage (OUTPUT to l2J should not exceed 0.2V/lls for loads under SOmA. The commutatll1Q dv/dt rating of the
module for loads SO-SOOmA (OUTPUT TO l2) is 4V1lls maximum. If the commutating dv/dt ratingof the TRIAC is exceeded. the TRIAC could latch on. If
the commutating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the lO·SOmA range. a resistor may be added across the output and l2. The purpose of this resistor is to
increase the total output current to SOmA (i"V/R). At SOmA and above, the module has a higher commutating dv/dt rating. When adding a resistor for
mthe output to l2. be sure it is rated for the power that it wilt dissipate (p,,(V' '2)1R). If the commutating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the SO·SOOmA
range. the L1 AC waveform could be at fault. Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid, void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections.
Maximum wire size wi!! require extended housing - 17S6·TBE.
3 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual
4 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wir'lI1g and Grounding Guiderll1es·.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 7�32 Module-Specific Information

1756-0AS Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

Ll-0 OUT-O
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same
L 1-0 OUT-l
name are connected
together on the module. For Group 0
Ll-0 OUT-2
example, L1 can be
\ connected to any terminal Ll-O OUT-3
i marked Ll-O. Daisy chain
2. Do not physically connect to other Not used Group 0
Ll-O
more than two wires to a RTBs
single RTB terminal. When Ll-l
you daisy chain from a
group to another RTB. L1 -1 OUT-S
always connect the daisy Group 1
chain as shown. Jumper -'­ L 1-1 OUT-6
3. This wiring example shows wire
a single voltage source.
L1-1 OUT-7

4. If separate power sources L1 - 1 gfi Not used Group 1

t=:=;l
O:=U
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage. L2

Ll
40178-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

+5V L1-0
Surge
20A
G> AC OUTPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 � 1d<9
OUT-O
'------'
2A e
o 43ms
41161-M Time 20S78-M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-33

17S6-0AS Specifications
Number of Outputs a (4 points/common)
Module Location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 200mA @ 5,lVdc & 2m A @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 1 .07W)
Maximum Power Dissipation 5.1W@ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 17.39 BTU/hr
Output Voltage Range 74·265Vac, 47·63Hz
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ 60'C (Linear derating)
Per Module 5A max. @ 30·C & 4A max. @ 60·C (linetlr derating)
Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60"C
Minimum Load Current lOrnA per point
Maximum On· State Voltage Drop 1.5V peak @ 2A & 6V peak @ current<50mA
Max. Off·State Leakage Current 3mA per point
Commutating Voltage 4V/�s for loads>50mA
0.2V/�s for loads<50mA1
Output Delay Time
OFF toON 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 1 1 ms @ 50Hz
ON to OFF 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 11 ms @ 50Hz
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the CST
Configurab!e Fault States/Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak
Fusing Not protected - Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs
(See publication 1492-2.12)
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for l s (265V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 s (265V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7·9 inch·pounds (0.8-1 Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 POSition RTB (1756·TBNH or TBSHj2
Environmental Conditions
�
operatjn Temperature o to 60"C (32 to l40"Fj
Storage emperature -40 to SS"C (-40 to lSS"Fj
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22.14.gau e (2mm2) stranded 2
3/64 inch 1 .2mm) insulation maximum
Category ,3.4
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (amm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or ([0 listed Industrial Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
packaging is marked)
�" Certified Class I, Division 2. Group A. B. C. 0
� Approved Class I. Division 2, Group A. B. C. 0
(€ Mar�ed for all applicable directives

� Mar.ked for all applicable acts

I The commutating dv/dt of the output voltage (OUTPUT to l2) should not exceed O.2V1J.1s for loads under 50mA. The commutating dv/dt rating of the
module for loads 50·500mA (OUTPUT TO LZ) is 4V1J.1s maximum, If the commutating dv/dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded, the TRIAC could latch on. If
the commulating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the 1O·50mArange. a resistor may be added across the output and LZ. The purpose of this resistor is to
increase the total output current to SOmA (I=N/R). AtSOmA and above. the module has a higher commutating dv/dt rating. When adding a resistor for
mthe OUtput to l2, be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate (P�(V' 'Z)/R). If tile commutating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the SO·SOOmA
range. the l1 AC waveform could be at rault. Be sure the waveform is a good.
2 Maximum wire size wilJ require extended housing ' 1756·T8E.
1 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
4 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 7·34 Module-Specific Information

1756-0ABO Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4-11

No Load Detection Enabled 4-21

Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4-22
Pulse Test Performed at user's request 4-22
Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 4-24
Communications Format CST tirnestamped fuse 6-6
data - output data

Program Mode orr 6-11

Communications Failure in Program Mode Disabled 6-11

Fault Mode orr 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

Daisy
chain to
Not used
� � L2-0
other RTBs Ll-0
� � OUT-O

) NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same

name are connected
Group 0 ll-O
� � OUT-l Group 0

together on the module. For Ll-0 �

'"
� OUT-2

� �
example, L1 can be
connected to any terminal Ll-0 OUT-3
"

� �
marked Ll-0.
2. Do not physically connect Ll-l
more than two wires to a
single RTB terminal. When
Ll-l � � OUT-S

you daisy chain from a

group to another RTB. Jumper Ll-l �
'"
�
"
OUT-6

always connect the daisy

chain as shown.
wire
Group 1 11-1 � � OUT-7 Group 1

3. This wiring example shows 11-1 � � L2-1

a single voltage source.
Co L2
4. If separate power sources
are used, do not exceed the "--
specified isolation VOltage.
Ll
40185-M
Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator
Diagnostic Control Block with
Surge @ 30°C
Opto & Transformer Isolation 11 SA G> AC OUTPUT
ControlBus
Interface "
Surge @ 60'C <3
5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
old
SA
Short
"
ru

FlT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K
.¥' Continuous @ 30'C
u
lA
0

Verify/N
Continuous @ 60'C
__

e
OUT
a Load 500mA
l2
0
Display loss of Field Power
43ms
DIAGNOSTIC
41l1B-M Time
40B4B-M lO935-M

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-35

1756-0ABD Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 [4 points/common)

Module location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 175mA @ 5.1Vde& 250mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 6.89W)
Maximum Power Dissipation [Module) 5.3W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 18 BTU/hr
Output Voltage Range 74·132V ae, 47·63Hz
Output Current Rating
Per Point lA max @ 30"C & O.SA mm;. @ 60°C [linear derating)
Per Module SA max @ 30"C & 4A max. @ 60°C (linear derating)
Surge Current per Point SA for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 30°C
SA for 43ms each, repeatable every 1 s @ 60°C
Minimum load Current 10mA per point
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop 2.SV peak@ O.SA & 3V peak @ lA
Maximum Off-State leakage Current 3mA per point
t{
Output oel Time
Off to a 9.3ms @ 60Hz: 11 ms @ 50Hz
ON to OFF 9.3ms @ 60Hz; 1 1 m s @ 50Hz
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Diagnostic Functions
Short Trip 12A for 500�s minimum
NoLioad Orf state detection only
Output Verification On stale detection only
Pulse Test User selectable maximum width & user selectable maximum time delay from
zero cross
Field Power Loss (Zero Cross) Detects at 25V peak minimum (Firmware phase locked loop)
Time stamp of diagnostics +/- 1ms
Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak
Fusing Electronically fused per point
Isolation Voltage .

Group to group 100% tested at 2546V de for 15 (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch·pounds (O.8·1Nm)
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH)
Environmental Conditions
�
Operatin Temperature o to 60"C {32 to 140"f]
Storage emperature -40 to 85"C (-40 to 185"f]
Relative Humidity S to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size �
22-14 .gau e (2mm2) stranded]
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category
1 2, 3
Screwdriver Width for RTB 5/16 inch (8mm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) 1:\fi;1; Listed Industrial Control EqL1ipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
@.. Certified Class !. Division 2, Group A. S, C. D

� Approved Class I, Division 2. Group A. B. C. 0

« Marked for all applicable directives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223

MaXimum wire size will reqUire extended housmg - 1756·TBE.

Use this conductor categocy information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1 770·4.1 "Industrial AulOmatlO!1 Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7�36 Module-Specific Information

1756-0ASE Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 3-17
Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 3-17
Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data - 6-6
output data
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Program Mode Disabled 6-11
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module_

--l. -

Daisy N�ed �ffi0 � L2-0

�� � A
chain to
Ll-O OUT-O
NOTES: ,_ All terminals with the same other RTBs Y
name are connected
together on the module. For
Group 0 Ll-O
� � OUT-' Group 0

example, L1 can be
connected to any terminal
Ll-O
� � OUT-2 A
Y

� �
Jumper ------+-­
marked L1-0. wire L1-0 OUT-3
f= =

� �
2. Do not physically connect
A
more than two wires to a L1-' OUT-4 Y

� �
single RTB terminal. When
Ll-1 OUT-S
you daisy chain from a

� � A
group to another RTB.
Ll-1 OUT-6
always connect the daisy Y
chain as shown.
3. This wiring example shows
Group 1
L1 - 1 � � OUT-) Group 1

a single voltage source.

4_ If separate power sources
Ll-1
L- � � L2-'
-
L2
are used, do not exceed the 0
specified isolation voltage.

b
"-

[ Ll
�0163·M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

Diagnostic Control Block with
Opto & Transformer Isolation 20A
f---:s::u�
::rg'::.
e_____
L1 Go- AC OUTPUT
ControlBus .-------
-- - ---. ,-----e
-,-
8
ST 0 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
Interface
Short
�--t--� �
_Verify/N
fUSEO 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 K 19
o Load
OUT e
L2 lA
Display Loss of Field Power ELECTRONICAllY FUSED

41118·M a 43ms 40852·M

Time Z0995·M

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-37

1756-0ABE Specifications

Number of Outputs a (4 points/common)

Module location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 200mA @ 5.1V dc & 250mA @ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 7.02W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) 5.5W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 18.76 8TU/he
Output Voltage Range 74·132V ac, 47·63Hz
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ 60·C
Per Group 4A max. @ 30·C & 2A max @ 60'C (linear derating)
Per Module SA max. @ 30'C & 4A max @ 60'C (Linear derating)
Surge Current per Point 20A For 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60'C
Minimum load Current lOrnA per point
Maximum On·State Voltage Drop 4V peak @ 2A
Max. Off·State leakage Current 3mA per point
Output Del Time
OFF to 0 U 9.3ms @ 60Hz; l l m s @ 50Hz
ON to OFf 9.3ms @ 60Hz; l l m s @ 50Hz
Diagnostic Functions
Short Trip >20A for lOOms minimum
Field Power loss (Zero Cross) Detects at 25V peak minimum (Firmware phase locked loop)
TIme stamp of Diagnostics +/· lms
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16. 7s maximum, reference to CST
Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak
FUSing Electronically fused per point
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 1 00% tested at 2546V de for 1 5 (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7·9 inch·pounds (0.8·1 Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756·TBNH or TBSH)l
Environmental Conditions
t
Operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"n
Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 18S"f)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22.14.gau e (2mm2) stranded'
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 2, 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (amm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or �) listed Induslrial Control Equipment

packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment

(@;� Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

� Approved Class 1, Division 2, Group A. B. C. D

(E: Marked for aU applicable directives

0 Marked for aU applicable acts

N223

MaXimum wire size Will require extended housing . '756·TSE.

Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routif1g as described in the system
level installation manual
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publ'lcation 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 1-38 Module-Specific Information

1756-0B160 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4-11

No load Detection Enabled 4-21

Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4-22

Pulse Test Performed at user's request 4-22

Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6-6

data - output data

Program Mode Off 6-11

Communications Failure in Program Mode Disabled 6-11

Faull Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

Daisy chain +DC-O

to other RTBs +DC-O
+DC-O
NOTES: 1. AI! terminals with the same
+DC-O
name are connected
together on the module. For +DC-O
\ Group 0 +DC-O Group 0
I example, DC COM can be
connected to either +DC-O
terminal marked GND-l.
Daisy chain .....--- GND-O
to other RTBs +DC-l
2. Do not physically connect
more than two wires to a +DC-l
single RTB terminal. When +DC-l
you daisy chain from a +DC-l DUT- 1 1
Jumper
group to another RTB, +DC-l DUT-12-l-....Jl�--+
wires
always connect the daisy +DC-l DUT-13
Group 1 Group 1
chain as shown. +DC-l DUT-14
3. This wiring example shows GND-l OUT-1 "-If-!'lr---+
a single voltage source. GND-l Not useo
Not used
4_ If separate power sources Not used
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage.

+
40173·M
DC COM

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

Short Circuit r--��---C::J
Detect Surge
+5V +5V 4A G> DC OUTPUT
Dptoisolation

I (}
'"
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

� 2A Continuous @ 30°C FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 �n

<3 5T 8 9 lJ1112131415 tj
Continuous @ 60'C FLT8 9 lJ 111213 1415 e
�t
1
Control DIAGNOSTIC
o
Bus
Interface Display OutputverifylNo load lOms
30343·M Time 40849-M 40463-M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module·Specific Information 7-39

1756-0B16D Specifications

Number of Outputs 15 (8 points/common)

Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 250mA @ 5.1Vdc& 140mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 4.64W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) 3.3W @ 50oC
Thermal Dissipation 1 1 .25 BTU/hr
Output Voltage Range 19.2·30V de
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ 30·C & 1A max. @ 60·C (Linear derating)
Per Module 8A max. @ 30·C & 4A max. @ 60·C (Linear derating)
Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each, repeatable every 1 s
Minimum Load Current 3mA per point
Maximum On·State Voltage Drop 1.2V dc @ 2A
Max. Off·State leakage Current 1 mA per point
Output Delay TIme
OFf to ON 1ms maximum
ON to OFF 5ms maximum
Diagnostic Functions:
Short trip 8A 180ms minimum
lOA 120ms minimum
No load OFF STATE detection only
Output verification ON STATE detection only
Pulse test User selectable maximum pulse width
TIme stamp of diagnostics -t/· 1ms
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF 'IS the default)
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Fusing Electronically fused per point
Reverse Polarity Protection None · If module is wired incorrecUy, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V de for 1s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch·pounds (OANmj maximum
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 35 Position RTB (1755·TBCH or TBS6H)1
Environmental Conditions
�
operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140o�
Storage emperature ·'0 to 8SoC HO to l8S0F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22-14.gau e (2mm2) stranded 1
3/64 inch l .2mm) insulation maximum
Category
1 2. 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or
packaging is marked)
® Listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control Equipment

@� Certified Class 1. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

� Approved Class I. Division 2, GfOUp A. B. C. D

«( Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

MaXimum Wife Slle Will require extended housmg ' 1756·TBE.

Use this conductor category information fOf planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 �lndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 1001

7�40 Module-Specific Information

1756·0B16E Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data - 6-6
output data
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

-
OUT-1 OUT-O A
58 V
OUT-3
ffi OUT-2

NOTES: 1. Do not physically OUT-5 OUT-4

connect more than two
Group 0
ffii Group 0

wires to a single RTB OUT-7 OUT-6

terminal. When you Daisy chain ffii
daisy chain from a group
to another RTB, always
to other
RTBs
DC-O(+)
� RTN OUT-O

�
=
connect the daisy chain OUT-9 OUT-8

4
as shown.
2. This wiring example
Jumper�
OUT- 1 1
� OUT- 1 0 _

�
shows a single voltage
wire OUT- 1 3 OUT-12
source. Group 1 Group 1
3. If separate power
sources are used, do not
OUT-15 � OUT-14

exceed the specified

isolation VOltage.
DC-1(+) � RTN OUT-1
-

+
I -
I
DC COM
40174-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

Optoisolation
DC-O(+)
G> DC OUTPUT
Surge
ZA e-..::.-
. ---- 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 e
Continuous
FUSE . on
ST 8 9 -0 11 12 13 1415 K bi
@ 60oC
1A

FUSE I e
o
Electronic RTN
Time
lOms ELECTRONICALLY FUSED
Fuse Circuitry 41113·M
OUT-O 40851-M 40464·M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-41

1756-0B16E Specifications

Number of Outputs 1 6 (8 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 250mA @ 5. 1 V dc & 2mA @ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 1.32W)
Maximum Power Dissipation {Module) 4.1 W @ 60oC
Thermal D-Issipation 1 3.98 BTU/hr
Output VOltage Range 10·31.2V dc
Output Current Rating
Per Point lA maximum @ 60"C
Per Module 8A maximum @ 60"C
Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60°C
Minimum Load Current 3mA per output
Maximum On·State Voltage Drop 400mV dc @ lA
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current 1 mA per point
�
Output Del Time
Off to 0 lms maximum
ON to Ofr lms maximum
Diagnostic Functions:
Short Trip 1.8A@ 24V dc (Output ON, then short)
4.1 A @ 24Vdc for 18ms (OutputON into short)
Time stamp of diagnostics +I- lms
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the CST
Conflgurab!e Fau!t States per Point Hold Last State, ON or Off (Off is the default)
Configurab!e States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or Off (Off is the default)
Fusing Electronically fused per group
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation VOltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250Vac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7·9 inch· pounds (0.8·1 Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756· TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
�
operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 1 40°f)
Storage emperature ·40 to 85°C (·40 to 1 8 5°f)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22.,4.gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch l .2mm) insulation maximum
Category 12 3
,

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5116 inch (8mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product or packaging (jf'
J.J
Listed Industria l Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
is marked)
@� Certified Class I, Division 2, Group A, B. C, D

� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A B, C. 0

C� Marked for all applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

1 Ma�lmum wire size will reqUire extended houSing · 17S6-TBE.

2 Use this conductor category inFormation for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
7·42 Module-Specific Information

1756-0B161 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode orf 6-1 1
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode orr 6-1 1

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

Isolated
Isolated DC-O(+) 0-- DC-O(+) OUT-O --'\r--O DC-O(-) sourcing
NOTES: 1. AI! terminals with the same
wiring OC-1(+) OUT-1 output
name are connected together on
the module. For example, DC(t)
OC-2(+) 0-- OC-2(+) OUT-2 --'\r--O OC-2(-) wiring
can be connected to either oC-3(+) OUT-3
terminal marked DC-1S. OC-4(+) OUT-4
2. Do not physically connect more
Sink output wiring OC-5(+) OUT-5
than two wires to a single RTB OC-6(+) 0:;:-+:::- oC-6(+) OUT-6 --0 DC-6(-)

� ��:��l::
terminal. When you use the oC-7(+) OUT-7
second DC-1 5{t} terminal to Jumper bar (Cut to length) DC·8(+) OUT-8
daisy chain to other RTBs, t oC-9(+) OUT-9
always connect the daisy chain
OUT-1 un-'\.-,
as shown.
OUT-1 1
3. Outputs can be wired in a sink or Non·isolated
source configuration as shown OC-1 2(+) OUT-1<+-­
wiring Non-isolated
above. OC-1 3(+) OUT-1>
sourcing
4. The jumper bar part number is OC-14(+) OUT-1 4..--'\.-4
output
97739201 . Contact your local OC-15(+) OUT-15-'\r-
Dc(+) wiring

C
Rockwell Automation sales 0 DC-15(+) Not used
representative to order Not used Not used
additionaljumper bars, if h-'-...L,-...,.c:::c;..j Oc(-)
necessary.
5. If separate power sources are
Daisy chain to other RTBs J0242-M
used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage.

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

Surge
4A G> DC OUTPUT

6
Continuous @ 30°C ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
2A
5T 8 9 lJ 11 121314 15 K Id
OUT·O c
Continuous @ 60°C e
Control Bus Interface �
u
o
Display Time 10ms 40457-M
30182-M 40849-M

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�43

1756-0B161 Specifications

Number of Outputs 16 (individually isolated)

Module Location 17S6 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 3S0mA @ S.lV dc & 2.SmA @ 24V dc
(1.8W Total backplane power)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) 3.6W @ 60'C
Thermal msslpation 12.28 BTU/hr
Output VOltage Range 10·30V dc
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ 30·C& 1 A max. @ 60·C (linearderating)
Per Module 8A max. @ 30·C & 4A max. @ 60·C (linear derating)
Surge Current/Point 4A for 10ms each, repeatable every 2s
Minimum Load Current 1 mA per paint
Max. On·State Voltage Drop 1.2V dc @ 2A
Max. Off·State leakage Current O.SmA per point
�
Output Del Time
OFF to 0 lms max.
ON to OFF 2ms max.
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 1 6.7s max., reference to the CST
Configurable Fault Statesl Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected - Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (See
publication 1492·2.12)
Reverse Polarity Protection None (If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.)
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous·voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4,4 inch·pounds (OANm) max.
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1 756·TBCH or TBS6H)'
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) max.
Environmental Conditions
t
operatin Temperature o to 6O"C (32 to 140·�
Storage emperature ·40 to 8S·C (·40 to 1 85·F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14·gauge (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch (l.2mm) insulation max.
Category 1 ', 3
Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) r.[() listed !ndustria! Control EqUipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
� Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

� Awoved Class I. Division 2. Group A. B, C, D

(� Marked for all applicable dirlKtives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1 MaXimum wire Sfle will reqUIre extended hOUSing - 1756·TBE.

2 Use this conductor category inFormation for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
l Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publkation 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March2C'01

7-44 Module·Specific Information

1756-0B32 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports. the default value and the page of the feature·s description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format Output data 6·6
Program Mode Off 6·11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6·11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6·1 1

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

OUT·l OUT·O
OUT·3 OUT·2
aUT·5 OUT·4
NOTES: 1. 00 not physically
OUT·) OUT·6
connect more than two
OUT·9 OUT·8
wires to a single RTB Group 0 Group 0
OUT·11 OUT·l0
terminal. When you
OUT·13 OUT· 1 2
daisy chain from a
OUT·15 OUT· 1 4
group to another RTB, Daisy chain to DC·O(+) RTN OUT·O
always connect the other RTBs
daisy chain as shown. OUT·l7 OUT·1 6
OUT· 1 9 OUT· 1 8
2. This wiring example
OUT·21 OUT·20
uses a single vOltage
OUT·23 OUT·22
source. Jumper
Group 1 OUT·25 OUT·24 Group 1
3. If separate power wire
OUT·26
sources are used, do not
OUT·28
exceed the specified
OUT·31 OUT·30
isolation voltage.
DC·1(+) RTN OUT·1

DC COM
40171-M

Simplified schematic DC·O(+)

Surge Current Chart LED indicator

.sv G- DC OUTPUT
our-o
$T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
� [d
'"
RTN to l A
Surge
ST 8 9 6��j��
our-o
m

Continuous
S � � � �6 � � �
u
�

T
O.SA
@ 60oC e
ControlBU5 Interface sT � � � � � � � i
L�- Oisplay
0
Time
10ms
30347·M 40B51-M 4046S-M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-45

1756-0832 Specifications

Number of Outputs 32 (16 points/common)

Module Location 1756 Contro!Logix Chassis
Backplane Current 300mA @ S.Wdc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane powerl .S8W)
Maximum Power Dissipation 4.8W@ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 16.37 BTU/hr
Output Voltage Range 1 0·31 .2V dc @ SOoC (Linear derating)
10·28V dc @ 60oC
Output Current Rating
Per Point O.SA maximum @ SO·C (Linear derating)
O.3SA maximum @ 60·C
Per Module 16A maximum @ SO·C (Linear derating)
lOA maximum @ 60·C
Surge Current per Point lA for 10ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60·C
Minimum Load Current 3mA per point
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop 200mV dc @ O.SA
Maximum Off·State Leakage Current O.SmA per point
Output Delay lime
OFF to ON lms maximum
ON to OFF lms maximum
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected · Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (See
publication 1 492·2.12)
Reverse Polarity Protection None · If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2S46V dc for ls (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for ls (2S0V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB ScrewTorque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch·pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB (17S6·TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
t
Operatin Temperature o to 60·C (32 to 140·F)
Storage emperature ·40 to 8S·C (·40 to 1 8S·F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22· 14 gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category ,',3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification (Ij--()
ijH:-tI
listed Industrial Control Equipment
(when product or
Certified Process Control Equipment
packaging is marked) Certified Class I, Division 2, Group A. B, C, 0

� Approved Class I, Division 2, Group A B, C, D

C€ Marked for aU applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

1 Maximum wire size WI!! require extended housing - 1756·1BE.

2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industria! Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7S6·UMOS8C·EN·P . March 2001

7-46 Module-Specific Information

1756-0BS Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format Output data 6·6
Program Mode orr 6·1 1
Communications failure in Disabled 6·11
Program Mode
Fault Mode on 6·1 1

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

� A
r-
Daisy chainto
other RTBs
DC·O(+)
�� OUT·O
Y

�
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same DC·O(+) OUT·l
name are connected on the

� A
module. For example, DC Jumper DC·O(+) OUT·2
COM can be connected to wire Y
either terminal marked Group 0 DC·O(+) Group 0
RTNOUH §lli OUT·3

2. Do not physically connect

more than two wires to a �
TN OUT·O
� RTN OUT·
=

single RTB terminal. When DC·l(+)

� OUT·4
A
Y

�
you daisy chain from a
DC·l (+) OUT·S
group to another RTB,

�
always connect the daisy Group 1 Group 1
DC·l(+) OUT·6
chain as shown.
3. This wiring example shows
a single vOltage source.
DC·l(+) � OUT·)
A
Y
4. If separate power sources �OUT'l � RTN OUT· ,
-
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation vOltage.

+
I I
-

I DC COM
I
40181-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

DC-O(+)
4A I-'
S" '-_
ur,,
ge - ____
+sv G- DC OUTPUT
OUT-O

Continuous
RTN 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
@ 60oC
OUT·O

Control Bus Interface

L3-- Display
o 10ms
30347·1.1 Time
40849·M 40456·M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-47

1756-088 Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 (4 points/common)

Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 165mA @ 5. W dc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 0.89W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 2.5W@ GOoC
Thermal D"lssipation 8.53 BTu/hr
Output Voltage Range 1O-30V de
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A maximum @ 60°C
Per Module 8A maximum @ 60°C
Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each, repeatable every ls @ 60°C
Minimum Load Current 2mA per point
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop 2V dc @ 2A
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current lmA per point
Output Delay Time
OFFto ON lms maximum
ON to Off 2ms maximum
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 1 6.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode/Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected - Fused !FM is recommended to protect outputs (See
publication 1492-2.12)
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged,
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V de for 1 s (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (0.8-1 Nm)
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140o�
Storage Temperature -40 to 85°C (-40 to 1 85°F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14-gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch l .2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 2. 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (8mm) maximum
Agency Certificat'lon
(when product or ([�I Listed Industrial Control Equipment

packaging is marked) Cerrified Process Control Equipment

@� Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A. B, C, 0
� Apll'oved Class I, Division 2, Group A. 8, C, 0
(E Marked for all applicable directives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223
, MaXimum Wire size will reqUire extended hOUSing - 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information forplanning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4,1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines',

Publication 17S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7-48 Module-Specific Information

1756-0BSEI Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data - 6-6
output data
Program Mode orr 6-1 1
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-1 1
Program Mode
Fault Mode OfF 6-11

Wiring example

l
Use the following example to wire your module.

Isolated
�DC-O(+)
1=-- RTN OUT-O
OUT-O
OUT-O
=1J
wiring DC-1(+) OUT-1
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the
RTN OUT-1 OUT-1
same name are connected +
� DC-2(+) OUT-2
together on the module.
1=-- RTN OUT-2 OUT-2
For example, the load can
DC-3(+) OUT-3
be connected to either
RTN OUT-3 OUT-3
terminal marked OUT-D.
Non-isolated wiring DC-4(+) OUT-4
2. Do not physically connect OUT-4
RTN OUT-4
more than two wires to a Daisy chain to DC-5(+) OUT-5
single RTB terminal. When other RTBs
RTN OUT-5 OUT-5
you daisy chain to other
�

Daisy chain """'fI DC-6(+) OUT-6

RTBs, always connect the
to other RTBs RTN OUT-6 OUT-6
daisy chain as shown.
DC-7(+) OUT-)
3. If separate power sources
RTN OUT-7 OUT-)
are used, do not exceed
Jumper Not used Not used
the specified isolation
wires Not used Not used
VOltage.
Daisy chain to
other RTBs +

DC COM
40169-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

4A
+5V
Surge
OC-O(+)
G> DC OUTPUT
Continuous Cl
C 2A @ 60oC
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
� Id
OUT-O
FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K

e
o
ELECTRONICALLY FUSED
lOms
ConlroJBus Interface Time
30351·M 40467·M

Pubncation 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�49

1756·0B8EI Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 (individually isolated)

Module Location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 2S0mA @ S.1V de & 2mA @ 24V de
(Total backplane power 1 .30W)
Max. Power Dissipation (Module) 4.7W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 1 6.03 BTu/hr
Output Voltage Range 10-30V de
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A maximum @ 60"C
Per Module lOA maximum @ 60"C & 16A maximum @ SS"C (linear derating)
Surge Current per Point 4A for l Oms each, repeatable every 2s
Minimum Load Current 3mA per point
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop 1.2V dc @ 2A
Max. Off-State leakage Current 1 rnA per point
Output Delay Time
Off ta ON lms maximum
ON to Off 5ms maximum
Diagnostic Functions:
Short trip >4.SA for SOO�s maximum (Output ON, then short)
>4.SA for 1.5ms maximum (Output ON into short)
Time stamp of diagnostics +/- lms
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
FUSing Electronically fused per point
Configurable fault States/Point Hold last State, ON or Off (Off is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode/Point Hold last State, ON or Off (Off is the default)
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (250V ac maximum continuous voltage)
User side to system side 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (250V ac maximum continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmenta! Conditions
Operating Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"f)
Storage Temperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 18S"f)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22-14-gau e (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 ', 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or
l!ib) Listed Industrial Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
packaging is marked)
@.. Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A. B. C. D

� Approved Class I. Division Z. Group A. B. C. 0

CE Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223
1 MaXimum ,we size Will require extended housmg - 1756·T8L
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level instaUation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial AutomationWiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 7S6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

7-50 Module·Specific Information

17S6-0C8 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports. the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6·11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-1 1

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

-
Daisy c hain to ,.....
A
NOTES: 1. All terminals with the other RTBs
DC-O(+)
�€ OUT-O
Y
same name are DC-O!+) OUT-1
connected together on Group 0 Group 0
the module. For example, DC·O!+) OUT-2
DC COM can be
connected to either
terminal marked
Jumper
wire
DC-O!+)
� OUT-3 A
y
RTN DUn TN OUT-O
;::=
� RTN OUT·"
=

�
2. Do not physically connect
DC-l!+)
A
OUT-4
more than two wires to a Y

�
single RTB terminal.
DC·1!+) OUT-S
When you daisy chain
Group 1 Group 1
�
from a group to another
DC-1(+) OUT-6
RTB, always connect the
daisy chain as shown.
3. This wiring example
DC-1!+) � OUT-7
A
Y
shows a single vOltage
source.
� OUT-1 � RTN OU.!..:c

4. If separate power
sources are used, do not + -

exceed the specified

I
I
isolation voltage. DC COM
40l82-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current CharI LED indicator

DC-O(+J
S rge
,sv 4A
G> DC OUTPUT
OUT-O

RTN
� 2A
Continuous
@ 60oC 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 � g6
�
OUT-O

ControlBus Interface
u
e
1 1-- Display
o 10ms
30347-M Time
40849-M 40455-M

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�51

1756-0C8 Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 (4 points/common)

Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 165mA @ 5.Wdc & 2mA @ 24V dc
[Total backplane power 0.89W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 4.9W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 16.71 BTu/hr
On State Voltage Range 30·60V dc
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A maximum @ 60QC
Per Module 8A maximu m @ 60·C
Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each, repeatable every 1 s @ 60·C
Minimum Load Current 2mA per point
Maximum On-State Voltage Drop 2V dc @ 2A
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current 1 rnA per pOint
�
Output oel Time
OFF to 0 1ms maximum
ON to OFF 2ms maximum
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected · Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (See
publication 1 492·2.12)
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If the module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (0.8-1 Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1 756-TBNH or TBSH)'
Environmental Conditions
t
Operatin Temperature o to 60·C (32 to 140·8
Storage emperature -40 to 85·C (-40 to 185·F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 22-14·gauge (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum
Category 1 ', 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (8mm) maximum
�
A ncy Certification
(w en product or
packaging is marked)
(�) listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control Equipment

@:� Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. 8, C, D

� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A. 8. C. D

(€ Marked for all applicable directives

e Marked for all applicable acts

N223
1 MaXimum wire Size will reqUife extended housing · 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor categOfY information for planning conductor routing as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

1-52 Module-Specific Information

1756-0HSI Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6-1 1
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
fault Mode Off 6-1 1

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES: 1_ All terminals with the

same name are
Isolated
wiring
l
� DC-O(+)
L- RTN OUT-O
OUT-O
OUT-O
=tJ
DC-l(+) OUT-l
connected together on RTN OUT-l OUT-l
the module. For example, +�DC-2(+) OUT-2
the load can be
RTN OUT-2 OUT-2
connected to either
DC-3(+) OUT-3
terminal marked OUT·O.
RTN OUT-3 OUT-3
2. Do not physically connect DC-4(+) OUT-4
Non-isolated wiring
more than two wires to a OUT-4
RTN OUT-4
single RTB terminal. Daisy chain to OUT-5
DC-5(+)
When you daisy chain to other RTBs
RTN OUT-5 OUT-5
other RTBs, always
�

Daisy chain DC-6(+) OUT-6

connect the daisy chain
to other RTBs RTN OUT-6 OUT-6
as shown.
DC-7(+) -- OUT-7
3. If separate power
RTN OUT-7 OUT-7
sources are used, do not
Jumper Not used Not used
exceed the specified
wires Not used Not used
isolation VOltage.
Daisy chain to
other RTBs +

DC COM
40169-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart lED indicator

DC-O{+)
S rge
4A G> DC OUTPUT
+sv

�Id6
OUT-O
Continuous
RTN 'l:: 2A @ 60oC 5T O l 2. 3 4 5 6 7
OUT-O �
u
e
ControlBus Interface

L::;).- Display a 10ms

30347·M Time 40B49·M 40465·M

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-53

1756-0HSI Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 (individually isolated)

Module Location 1756 Controllogix Chassis
Backplane Current 210mA @ 5.1V dc & 2mA @ 24Vdc
(Total backplane power 1 . 1 1W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 3.3W @ 60'C
Thermal Dissipation 1 1.25 BTUlhr
On State Voltage Range 90·146V dc
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A maximum @ 60°C
Per Module 8A maximum @ 60"C
Surge Current per Point 4A for 1 0ms each, repeatable every l s @ 60"C
Minimum Load Current 2mA per point
Maximum On·State VOltage Drop 2Vdc @ 2A
Maximum Off·State leakage Current lmA per point
;!
Output Del Time
OfF to 0 2ms maximum
ON to OFF 2ms maximum
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States/Point Hold last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected · Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (See
publication 1492·2.12)
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Channel to channel 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (250V ac maximum continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 second (25DV ac maximum continuous voltage)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Screw Torque (Cage clamp) 4.4 inch·pounds (OANm) maximum
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756·TBCH or TBS6H)'
Environmental Conditions
�
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 1 40'F)
Storage emperature ·40 to 85'C (·40 to 1 85'F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22.14.gau o (2mm') stranded'
3/64 inch 1 .2mm) insulation maximum
1 ', J
Category

Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

Agency Certification
(when product is marked) (th'
,_1,,1
listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control Equipment

@'" Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. B, C, D

� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

(E Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N22.3
,
MaXimum wire Size Will reqUire extended houslIlg · 1756·TBE.
2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in tile system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
7�54 Module-Specific Information

1756-0NB Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:
Feature Default value Page of description
Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES: 1_ All terminals with the Daisy chain to

same name are connected other RTBs
L1-0
� OUT-O

together on the module. L1-0 OUT-1

For example, L1 can be �
Group 0 L1-0 OUT-2 Group 0
connected to any terminal
marked L1-1.
�
2_ Do not physically connect
more than two wires to a
Jumper
wire
L1-0
� OUT-3

Single RTB terminal.

L1-0
� Not used
When you daisy chain
from a group to another
L1-1 � OUT-4
RTB, aIways connect the
daisy chain as shown.
L1-1
� OUT-5

3. This wiring example

shows a single vOltage
Group 1 L1-1
� OUT-6 Group 1

source. L 1-1 � OUT-7

4. If separate power sources L2
are used, do not exceed L1-1 � Not used
the specified isolation
voltage. Q

40184-M

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

+5V 11-0
Surqe
20A G> AC OUTPUT

--=?fi�n�=:
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 � fd<9
c==) 2A
e
Control Bus Interface

o 43ms
41161-M Time
40852-M 2097S-M

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-55

1756-0NB Specifications

Number of Outputs 8 (4 points/common)

Module location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 200mA @ s.W dc & 2mA@ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 1.07)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Mod.) 5.1W@ 60oe
Thermal Dissipation 17.39 BTU/hr
Output Voltage Range 10-30V ac. current>50ma 47-63Hz
16-30V ac. current<50ma 47-63Hz
Output Current Rating
Per Point 2A max. @ SO°C
Per Module SA max. @ 300C;4A max. @ 60°C (Linear derating)
Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60°C
Min. load Current 10mA per point
Max. On-State Voltage Drop 1.5V peak @ 2A & 6V peak @ load current<50mA
Max. Off-State leakage Current 3mA per point
Commutating Voltage 4V1lls for loads>50mA
O.2V!flS for loads<50mA1
Output Delay Time
OFF to ON 9.3ms @ 60Hz: 11ms@ 50Hz
ON to OFF 9.3ms @ 60Hz: l1ms @ 50Hz
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within lS.7s maximum. reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State. ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State. ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Fusing Not protected - Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs
(See publication 1 492-2.12)
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1s [250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 5 (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA) 7-9 inch-pounds (O.B·1Nm)
Module Keying (8ackplane) Sortware configurable
RT8 Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1756-T8NH or T8SH)2
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
. Storage Temperature -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size 0
22-14.gau e (2mm2) stranded2
3/64 inch l.2mmJ insulation maximum
Category
1 3•4
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5/16 inch (Smm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked) rJfj) listed Industrial Control Equipment

Certified Process Control EqUipment

@;� Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

� Approved Class I, Division 2. Group A, B, C, 0

C� Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for aU applicable acts

N223
1
The commutatmg dv/dt of the outputvolta(Jc (OUTPUT to l2) should not exceed O.2V//lS for loads under SOmA. The commutatlOQ dv/dt rating of the
module for loads 50·S00mA (OUT P UT TO L2) is 4V1lls maximum. If the commutating dv/dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded. the TRlAC could latch on. !f
the commutating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the lO·SOmA range. a resistor may be added across the output and L2. The purpose of this resistor is to
increase the total output current to SOmA (IN/RJ. At SOmA and above, the module has a higher commuta\ing dv/dt rating. When adding a resistor for
mthe output to 12, be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate (P�(V··2)/R). If the commutating dv/dt rating is exceeded in the 50·500mA
range, the II AC waveform could be at fault. Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid. void if any anomalies such as distorted or nattened sections.
2 Maximum wire size will require extended housing - 1756·TBE.
3 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual.
4 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 �Industriat Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7·56 Module-Specific Information

1756-0V16E Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module
supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data - 6-6
output data
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-1 1

Wiring example
Use the following example to wire your module.

�
-

OUT-1 OUT-O

NOTES: 1. Do not physically connect

OUT-3 � OUT-2

more than two wires to a

single RTB terminal. When
GroupO OUT-S
� OUT-4 Group 0

you daisy chain from a group

to another RTB, always
OUT-7
� OUT-6

DC-O(+)
connect the daisy chain as � RTN OUT-O
=
Daisy chain
to other
�
shown.
OUT-9 OUT-8 RTBs
2. This wiring example shows a

�
single vOltage source. OUT-ll OUT-10
3. If separate power sources
I- Jumper
are used, do not exceed the
specified isolation voltage.
Group 1 OUT-13
� OUT-12
Group 1 wire

4. If separate power sources

are used, do not exceed the
OUT-1S
� OUT-14

specified isolation vOltage. DC-1(+) � RTN OUT-1

+ -

I
I DC COM 42551

Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator

Display Optoisolation
DC-O(+)
G>- DC OUTPUT
Surge
OUT-O 2A I---=-----� ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 e
Continuous
FUSE ' on
lA @ 600C
5T B 9 lJ ll12131415 K bI
RTN FUSE I e
OUT-O o
ControlBu5 Electronic lOms ElECTRONICALLY FUSED
Time
Interface 42673·M Fuse Circuitry 40B51-M 40464·M

Publication 17S6-UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7�57

17S6-0V16E Specifications
Number of Outputs 1 6 (S points/common)
Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
Backplane Current 210mA @ 5.1V dc & 2mA @ 24V dc
(Total backplane power 1 . 1 2W)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Module) 6.72W @ 60oC
Thermal Dissipation 22.94 BTu/hr
Output VOltage Range 10·30.0V dc
Output Current Rating
Per Point 1A maximum @ 60°C
Per Module SA maximum @ 60°C
Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60°C
Minimum Load Current 2mA per output
Maximum On-State VOltage Drop )OOmV dc @ lA
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current 1 mA per point
�
Output Del Time
OFF to 0 1ms maximum
ON to OFF 1ms maximum
Diagnostic Functions:
Short Trip 5A for 20mS @ 24V dc (Output ON, then shorted)
5A for 20mS @ 24V dc (Output turned ON into short)
Timestamp of diagnostics +/-lms
Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum, reference to the CST
Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State, ON or OFF (OFF is the default)
fusing Electronically fused per group
Reverse Polarity Protection None - If module is wired incorrectly, outputs may be damaged.
Isolation Voltage
Group to group 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for ls (250V ac max. continuous voltage)
RTB Screw Torque (NEMA clamp) )·9 inch·pounds (O.S-l Nm)
Module Keying (Backplane) Software configurable
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB (1 )56-TBNH or TBSH)1
Environmental Conditions
�
operatin Temperature o to 60°C (32 to 1 40°f)
Storage emperature -40 to S5°C (-40 to l S5°f)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Conductors Wire Size r
22-14-gau e (2mm1) stranded'
3/64 inch 1 .2mm) insulation maximum
Category 11, 3
Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5116 inch (Smm) maximum
Agency Certification
(when product is marked) ® listed Industrial Control Equipment
Certified Process Control Equipment
@. Certified Class I. Division 2, Group A, B. C, 0

� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A. B, C. 0

(£ Marked for all applicable directives

0
N223
Marked for all applicable acts

1 Maximum wire size Will reqUire extended housmg · 1755-TBE.

2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor lOuting as described in the system
level installation manual.
3 Refer to publication 1770·4.1 "Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines'.

Publication 1 756-UM05SC·EN-P . March 2001

7RS8 Module-Specific Information

1756-0W161 Configurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Formal Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6-11
CommunicaUons Failure in Disabled 6-1 1
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same name

are connected together on the OUT-O N,O. --I\r---o L2-0
module. For example, L1 can be OUT-1 N.O.
connected to either terminal OUT-2 N.O. --I\r---o L2-2
marked 11-15. OUT-3 N.O.
2. Do not physically connect more OUT-4 N.O. -1--0 OC-4(-)
than two wires to a single RTB OUT-5 N.O.
terminal. When you use the OUT-6 N.O,
second L'·1 5 terminal to daisy OUT-7 N.O.
chain to other RTBs, always OUT-8 N.O.
connect the daisy chain as shown. OUT-9 N.O.
OUT-10 N.O.
3. When using thejumper bar to
daisy chain terminals together as OUT-ll N.O.-Jl r-�
shown, the maximum current OUT- 1 2 N.O.
you may apply to the module OUT- 1 3 N.O. ---'\t--1'
through a single contact point OUT- 1 4 N.O.
is SA. OUT- 1 5 N.O.-Jl,.----'
Not used
4. Thejumper bar part number is
Not used
97739201. Contact your local
Rockwell Automation sales L2
representative to order additional
jumper bars, if necessary.
5. If separate power sources are 30240·M
used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage.

Simplified schematic LED indicator

+24V
G> RELAY OUTPUT
Display
e
Control Bus ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
ST 8 9 tl 11 12 131415 K id
Interface

e
30337·M LL.._______.LJ 40455·M

Publication 1756-UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-59

1756-0W161 Specifications

Specification: Value: Specification: Value:

Number of Outputs 16 N.D. (Contacts individually isolated) UL Ratings C300, R1S0 Pilot Duty
Module Location 17S6 ControlLogix Chassis Minimum Load Current lOmA per point
Backplane Current lS0mA @ S.lV dc & lS0mA @ 24Vdc Initial Contact 30mQ
(Total backplane power 4.37W) Resistance

Maximum Power 4.SW @ 60oC Switching Frequency 1 operation/3s (O.3Hz at rated load) maximum
Dissipation (Module)
Thermal Dissipation lS.3S BTU/hr Bounce Time 1.2ms (mean)
Output VOltage Range 1 0-26SV 47 -63HzlS-1S0V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive/lOOk cycles inductive

Output VOltage Range S-30V de @ 2A resistive Isolation Voltage

(load dependent) 48V dc @ O.5A resistive Channel to channel 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1 s
1 25V dc @ O.2SA resistive {265V ae maximum continuous voltage}
1 25V ac @ 2A resistive User to system 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 s
240V ac @ 2A resistive (265V ae maximum continuous voltage)
Output Current Rating Resistive
2A @ S-30V dc
Power Ratin
(steady state
� 250W maximum for 1 25V ac resistive output
480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output
(at rating power)
0.5A @ 48Vdc 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output
0.25V @ 1 2SV de 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output
2A @ 12SV ac 31 W maximum for 1 25V dc resistive output
2A @ 240Vac 250VA maximum for 1 25V ac inductive output
Inductive 480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output
2A steady state @ S-30V de 60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output
O.SA steady state @ 48V dc 24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output
0.2SA steady state @ 12SV de 31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output
2A steady state, lSA make @ 125V ac
2A steady state, 15A make @ 240 V ac
Maximum Off-State 1.5mA per point Fusing Not protected - Fused IFM is recommended to
Leakage Current protect outputs (See publication 1492 -2.12)

Output Delay Time Environmental

Off to On lOms maximum Conditions o to 60"C (32 to 1 40"F)
On to Off lOms maximum t
Qperatin Temperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 18S"F)
Storage emperature 5 to 95% noncondensing
Relative Humidity
Configurable Fault States Hold Last State, ON or OFF Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16.7s maximum,
Per Po'int (OFF is the default) reference to the CST
Configurable States in Hold Last State, ON or OFF RTB Screw Torque 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
Program Mode per Point (OFF is the default) (Cage clamp)
Module Ke ng
(Backplane
t Software configurabte Screwdriver Blade Width
for RTB
1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum

RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1 756-TBCH or TBS6H)'
Conductors Agency Certification
Wire Size 22-14-gauge (2mm') stranded ' (when product or Q[I.) listed Industrial Control Equipment

3/64 inch (1.2mm) insulation maximum packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment

Category 1 ', 3 �� Certified Class I. Division 2. Group A. 8. C. D

� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A. 8. C. 0

(€ Marked for ali applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1
MaXimum wire s[re will require extended hOUSing - 1156·TBE.
Use this (onductOl category inlOi'mation for planning conductor routing as described irl lhe system level installation manual.
Refer to pUblicatloo l770.4.1. "PlOgrammable COIltroiler Wiring and Grounding Guidelines-

Publication 17S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7·60 Module-Specific Information

1 756-0XSI Gonfigurable features

The following table lists the configurable features this module

supports, the default value and the page of the feature's description:

Feature Default value Page of description

Communications Format Output data 6-6
Program Mode Off 6-11
Communications Failure in Disabled 6-11
Program Mode
Fault Mode Off 6-11

Wiring example

Use the following example to wire your module.

NOTES: 1. All terminals with the same name

are connected together on the
module. For example, Ll-D can be
connected to either terminal
Isolated
wIring
Ll·O O -- Ll·O
Ll·O
Ll-1
OUT·O N.C.
OUT·O N.O.
OUT-1 N.C.
----'Ir-
�-, -o L2-0

marked Ll-D. Ll-1 OUT-1 N.O.

DC-2(+) 0------1.1 .2
2_ Do not physically connect more OUT-2 N.C. ----'Ir--, .o- DC.2(.)
than two wires to a single RTB Ll-2 OUT-2 N.O. �
terminal. When you use the third L1-3 OUT-3 N.C.
Ll-7 terminal to daisy chain to
L1-3 OUT-3 N.O.
other RTBs, always connect the Jumper bar (Cut t o length) Ll-4 OUT-4 N.C.
daisy chain to the terminal directly
I L1-4 OUT-4 N.O.

�
connected to the supply wire, as
L1-5 OUT-5 N.C.
shown.
L1-5 OUT-5 N.O.
:
3_ When using thejumper bar to
daisy chain terminals together as
Non·isolated L1-6 OUT-6 N.C. -'\--
wiring

(
shown, the maximum current L1-6 OUT-6 N.O.
you may apply to the module L1-7 OUT-7 N.C. -'\--
through a single contact point Ll-7 OUT-7 N.O.
is BA. L1 ()-----c= Ll-7 Not used
4. Thejumper bar part number is t used Not used
97739201 . Contact your local L2
Rockwell Automation sales
representative to order additional r
jumper bars, if necessary.
5, If separate power sources are
Daisy chain to other RTBs 0 0 30241-M
used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage.

Simplified schematic lED indicator

+24V
G> RELAY OUTPUT
11-0

�fd<5
J -�
. J \'-t--- ---
ST O l Z 3 4 5 6 7

e
OUT·O N.O.

40456-M

Publication 1 756-UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Module-Specific Information 7-61

1756-0XSI Specifications

Specification: Value: Specification: Value:

Number of Outputs 8 N.D. & 8 N.C. (2 points/common) Ul Ratings C300, R1S0 Pilot Duty
Module Location 17S6 Controllogix Chassis Minimum Load Current 10mA per point
Backplane Current 100mA @ S.1V dc & 100mA @ 24V dc Initial Contact Resistance 30mQ
(Total backplane power 2.91W)
Maximum Power 3.1 W @ 60'C Switching Frequency 1 operationl3s (O.3Hl at rated load) maximum
Dissipation (Module)
Thermal Dissipation lO.S7 BTu/hr Bounce Time 1.2ms (mean)
Output VOltage Range 10-265V 47-63HzlS-150V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistivel100k cycles inductive
Output Voltage Range S-30V dc @ 2A resistive Isolation VOltage
(load dependent) 48V dc @ O.SA resistive Channe! to channel 100% tested at 2546V dc for 1 5
1 2SV dc @ 0.2SA resistive (26SV ac maximum continuous voltage)
1 25V ac @ 2A resistive User to system 100% tested at 2S46V dc for 1 5
240V ac @ 2A resistive (265V ac maximum continuous voltage)
Output Current Rating Resistive Power Rating (steady state) 250W maximum for 1 25V ac resistive output
(at rating power) 2A @ S-30V dc 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output
0.5A @ 48Vdc 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output
O.2SA @ 1 2SV dc 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output
2A @ 12SV ac 31 W maximum for 1 25V dc resistive output
2A @ 240V ac 250VA maximum for 1 25V ac inductive output
Inductive 480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output
2A steady state @ 5-30V dc 60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output
O.SA steady state @ 48V dc 24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output
O.2SA steady state @ 1 2SV dc 31VA maximum for 1 25V dc inductive output
2A steady state, l SA make @ 1 2SV ac
2A steady state, lSA make @ 240 V ac
Maximum Off-State OmA Fusing None - Fused IFM is recommended to protect
Leakage Current outputs (See pub. 1 492-2.12)
Output Delay Time Environmental Conditions
Off to on 1 3ms maximum t
operatin Temperature o to 60"C (32 to 140"F)
On to off 1 3ms maximum Storage emperature -40 to 8S"C (-40 to 18S"F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Configurable Fault States Hold last State, ON or OFF Scheduled Outputs Synchronilation within 16.7s maximum,
per Point (OFF is the default) reference to the CST
Configurab!e States in Hold last State, ON or OFF RTB Screw Torque 4.4 inch-pounds (O.4Nm) maximum
Program Mode per Point (OFF is the default) (Cage clamp)
Module Ke ,ng
(Backplane
) Software configurable Screwdriver Blade Width 1/8 inch (3.2mm) maximum
for RTB
RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB (1756-TBCH or TBS6H)'

0
Conductors Agency Certification
Wire Size 22-14-gau e (2mm') stranded' (when product or 1J!j.) listed Industria! Control Equipment

3/64 inch 1 .2mm) insulation maximum packaging is marked) Certified Process Control Equipment
Category
1 ', J (@;. Certified Class 1. Division 2. Group A. B. C. D

� Approved Class I. Division 2. Group A. B. C. 0

C� Marked for all applicable directives

0 Marked for all applicable acts

N223

1 Maximumwire size will require extended housing - 1755·TBE.

2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system leveljnstallation manual
1 Refer to publication 1770·4.1. ·Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines"

Publication 1 7S6-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

7�62 Module-Specific Information

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about module specific information. Move
on to Chapter 8, Troubleshooting Your Module.
What's Next

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Chapter 8

Troubleshooting Your Module

What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes the indicators on the ControlLogix digital
modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module. The
following table describes what this chapter contains and its location.

For information about: See page:

Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your 8-1
Module
Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your 8-4
Module
Chapter Summary and What's Next 8·6

Using Indicators to Each ControlLogix I/O module has indicators which show individual
I/O state (yellow) , fault, or fuse status (red) , A bi-colored LED
Troubleshoot Your Module indicates module status with an "OK" (red/green) . LED indicators are
located on the front of the module.

LED indicators for input modules

Table B.A
Status Indicators for Input Modules

LEO This display: Means: Take this action:

indicators:
OK Green light The inputs are being None
multicast and in normal
operating state.
OK Flashing green light The module has passed None
internal diagnostics but is
not multicasting inputs or it
is inhibited.
OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller and
communication has timed chassis communication.
out.
OK Red light The module must be Replace the module.
replaced.
1/0 State Yellow The input is active. None
1/0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for this Check this point at the
pOint. controller.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

8-2 Troubleshooting Your Module

The following LED indicators are used with input modules:

1756·IA8D 1756·IB161, IH161, 1B16, IC16, IV16

��
-E) AC INPUT -E) DC INPUT
8
110 State - 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I- Module 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
1I0 Fauit - FlT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status ST 8 9 lJ 1112131415 K D
e e
DIAGNOSTIC

1 756·1B16D 1756·IB32, 1756·IV32 1756·IA16, IA161, IM161, IN16

�B
-E) DC INPUT -E) DC INPUT -E) AC INPUT
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8
5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 7
6���!� 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
FlT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5T 8 9
5T 8 9 lJ11 1213141S K D
ST 8 9 -o n 1213 1415 ST �� � � � n � e e
FlT 8 9 XI 111213 14 15 5T � � � � � � 5 �

DIAGNOSTIC
20945

lED indicators for output modules

Table 8.B
Status Indicators for Output Modules

LED This display: Means: Take this action:

indicators
OK Steady green light The outputs are actively None
being controlled by a
system processor.
OK Flashing green light The module has passed None
internal diagnostics but is
not actively controlled or it
is inhibited.
OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller and
communication has timed chassis communication.
out.
OK Steady red light The module must be Replace the module.
replaced.
110 State Yellow The output is active. None
110 Fuse Red A short overload fault has Check wiring for short
occurred for a point in overload.
this group. Check the module
properties in RSLogix 5000
and reset the fuse.
110 Fault Red A fault has occurred for this Check this point at the
point. controller.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Troubleshooting Your Module 8-3

The following LED indicators are used with output modules.

1756-0A16 1756-0A161 1756-0AS, ONS

G> AC OUTPUT G> AC OUTPUT G> AC OUTPUT

1/0 Fuse
5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
U5E I 0
bI
a
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 [da
ST 0 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 [d
a

ST 8 9 1)11 1213 14 15 K ST 8 9 lJll12131415 K �

'us, " e Il Il

1756-0ASD 1756-0ASE 1756-0B16D

G> AC OUTPUT G> AC OUTPUT G> DC OUTPUT

a a 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8
5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 � n ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n FlT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 n
FlT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 tj FUSEO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 , tj ST 8 9 XI 111213 14 15 Id
Il I'l FLT 8 9 l)1112131415 �
DIAGNOSTIC ELECTRONICALLY FUSED DIAGtI05T1C

1756-0B16E 1756-0B161 1756-0B32

G> DC OUTPUT G> DC OUTPUT G> DC OUTPUT

5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 a 5T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FUSE I
5T 8 9 1)1112131415 °K .0.
U
!d ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
ST 8 9 X11112131415 K tj
I'l
ST 8 9 6 � � � � �
5T � � � � � � � �
FUSE I
ST � � � � � � � �
ELECTRONICALLY FUSEO

1756-0BS, OCS, OHSl 1756-0BSEI 1756-0W161

G> DC OUTPUT G> DC OUTPUT G> RELAY OUTPUT

a a a
�
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BI'l ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 n
FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 K tj
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 n
5T 8 9 X11112131415 K [d
I'l
I'l
ELECTRONICALLY FUSED
1756-0XSI

G> RELAY OUTPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 � b1a
I'l

404M

Publication 1 7 56·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

8-4 Troubleshooting Your Module

Using RSLogix 5000 to In addition to the LED display on the module, RSLogix 5000 will alert
you to fault and other conditions_ You will be alerted in one of three
Troubleshoot Your Module ways:

• Waming signal on the main screen next to the module-This

occurs when the connection to the module is broken

• Message in a screen's status line

• Notification in the Tag Editor - General module faults are also

reported in the Tag Editor. Diagnostic faults are only reported in
the Tag Editor

• Status on the Module Info page

The screens below display fault notification in RSLogix 5000.

Warning signal on main screen

B'-� 110 Configuration

1._.. � [0] 1 756-ENET 18 ENET
1::\ Warning icon when a .... � [2] 1 756-1 8 1 60 OIAGJNPU
ili communications fault occurs
. . � [4] 1756-08160 v,,,u,_uu
or if the module is inhibited
____ � [5] 1 756-CNB/B rm.ITo n,
- � [9] 1 756-M02.l>.E MOTION
Warning signal - The module in slot 9 has

Fault message in status line

Status line provides information on the

module's fault and on the connection
to the module

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Troubleshooting Your Module 8-5

A fault has occurred for any poinl lhat

lists the number 1 in the Faull nne

Determining Fault Type

When you are monitoring a module's configuration properties in

RSLogix 5000 and receive a Communications fault message, the
Connection page lists the type of fault.

The fault type is listed here

For a detailed listing of the possible faults, their causes and suggested
solutions, see Module Faults in the online help.

Publication 1755·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
8-6 Troubleshooting Your Module

Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about troubleshooting the module.

Whafs Next Move on to Appendix A, Using Software Configuration Tags.

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
 Appendix A

Using Software Configuration Tags

Although this appendix presents the option of

changing a module's configuration through the Tag
Editor of RSLogix 5000, we suggest that you use the
module's properties tabs to change configuration
when possible.

When you create a module, module-defined data types and tags are
created. These Tags allow you to access the Input and Output Data
and Configuration of Data of the module via the controller's ladder
logic.

The types of tags created vary for each module. There is also variation
among the tags for any particular module, depending on which
communications format you chose when creating a module.

For example, the 1 756-IA 16I module has four choices of

Communications Formats: Input Data, CST Timestamped Input Data,
Listen-Only Input Data, Listen-Only CST Timestamped Input Data. If
you choose CST Timestamped Input Data, several more tags are
created than if you choose Input Data.

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

A-2 Using Software Configuration Tags

The following screens show the difference between viewing change

of state for a point on the 1 756-IA161 module through the module's
properties tabs and the Data Monitor in the Tag Editor.

Module Properties
Change of state

Data Monitor

Change of state

Both screens show the same feature on the module.

Publication 1 7 56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A-3

Module Tag Names and The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module
and the Communications Format chosen du ring con figurat ion
Definitions
.

Standard Input Module Tags

Tables A.l and A.2 list and define all tags that may be used for
ControlLogix standard digital input modules. Input modules have two
types of tags:

• configuration
• input data.

The table below lists all possible standard input

module tags. In each application, though, the series
of tags varies, depending on how the module is
configured.

Configuration Tags

Table A.l
Slandard Inpul Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
COSOnOflEn Configuration Change of State ON 10 OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to
-

(1 bit per point) OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data
table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
O=disable, l=enable
COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of Slate OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to
-

(1 bit per point) ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data
table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
O=disable, l=enable
FillerOnOfCO_7 etc. Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF - Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for
(1 byte per group) ON to OFF transition. Operates on groups of 8 points.
Valid DC filter times=O, 1, 2, 9, 18ms
Valid AC filter times=l, 2ms
FilterOflOn_O_7 etc. Configuration FilterTimes OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules
-

(1 byte per group) for OFF to ON transition. Operates on groups of 8 points.

Valid DC filter times=O, 1, 2ms
Valid AC filter times=l, 2ms

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

A·4 Using Software Configuration Tags

Input Data Tags

Table A.2
Standard Input Module Input Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
CSTIimestamp Input data Coordinated S)'item Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to
-

(8 bytes) indicate the time that data changed (see COSOffOnEn. COSOnOffEn.
COSStatus, DiagCOSDisable) and/or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred
(see OpenWireEn, FieldPwrLossEn).
Data Input data Off/On status for the input point.
(1 bit per point) O=OIl, l=On
Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a pOint is faulted and
(1 bit per point) input data for that point may be incorrect. Check other diagnostic faults, if
they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to
the input module is lost, then all points for the module will be faulted.
O=no fault, l=fault (OpenWire or FieldPwrloss or Comm Fault)

Standard Output Module Tags

Tables A.3 to A.S list and define all tags that may be used for
ControlLogix standard digital output modules. Output modules have
three types of tags

• configuration
• input data
• output data.

The table below lists all possible standard output

module tags. In each application, though, the series
of tags varies, depending on how the module is
configured.

Configuration Tags

Table A.3
Standard Output Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
FaultMode Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of
-

(1 bit per point) outputs when a communications fault occurs. See FaultValue.
O=Use FaultValue (OFF or ON), l=Hold last State
FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of
-

(1 bit per point) outputs when a communications fault occurs. See FaultMode.
O=OFF, l=ON

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A�5

Table A.3
Standard Output Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
ProgMode Configuration Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state
-

(1 bit per point) of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode. See ProgValue.
O=Use ProgValue (OFF or ON), l=Hold Last State
ProgValue Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state
-

(1 bit per point) of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode. See ProgMode.
O=OIl, l=On
ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of
-

(1 byte per module) outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode.
Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode. See ProgMode, ProgValue,
FaultMode, FaultValue.
O=outputs stay in ProgramMode if comm failure
l=outputs got to FaultMode if comm failure

Input Data Tags

Table A.4
Standard Output Module Input Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input
-

(8 bytes) data including fusing (see BlownFuse, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault,

FieldPwrLoss), which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes
away.
Data Input data Data OfflOn status for the output point ECHOED back from the output
-

(1 bit per point) module, This is used to verify proper communication only No field side
verification is done, For field side verification, see OutputVerifyFault.
O=OIl, l=On
Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and
(1 bit per point) 110 data for that point may be incorrect. Check other diagnostic faults, if they
are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to the
input module is lost, then all points for the module will be faulted,
O=no fault, l=fault (FuseBlown, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault,
FieldPwrLoss, or CommFault)
FuseBlown. Input Data Fuse is Blown - An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or
(1 bit per point) overload condition for an output point. All FuseBlown conditions are latched
and must be reset by the User.
O=no fault, 1 =fault

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
A-6 Using Software Configuration Tags

Output Data Tag

Table A.S
Standard Output Module Output Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
CSTIimestamp Output data Coordinated System TIme TImestamp Timestamp to be used with
-

(8 bytes) Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time {CSn, Used to synchronize
outputs across the system by indicating the time (CST TImestamp) at which
the output module is to apply its outputs.
Data Output data Off/On status for the output pOint. originating from the controller
(l bit per point) 0=OIf, 1 =On

Diagnostic Input Module Tags

Tables A.6 and A.7 list and define all tags that may be used for
ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules. Input modules have
two types of tags

• configuration
• input data.

The table below lists all possible diagnostic input

module tags. In each application. though. the series
of tags varies, depending on how the module is
configured.

Configuration Tags

Table A.6
Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to
-

(l bit per point) OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data
table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
0=disable, 1=enable
COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to
-

(l bit per point) ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data
table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
0=disable, 1=enable
DiagCOSDisable Configuration Diagnostic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic
-

(per module) status data with an u�dated timestamp as soon as the diagnostic data
changes state

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A-7

Table A.6
Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
FaultlatchEn Configuration Fault is latched - If enabled for a point. any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss will
(1 bit per point) stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the
User clears the fault.
O=disable, 1=enable latching
FieldPwrlossEn Configuration Field Power loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic.
-

(1 bit per point) O=disable, 1=enable

FilterOnOIU_7 etc. Configuration Filter TImes ON to OFF - Filter time for digital Ii Iter in digital input modules for
(1 byte per group) ON to OFF transition. Operates on groups of 8 points.
Valid DC filter times=O, 1, 2, 9, 18ms
Valid AC lilter times=1, 2ms
FilterOffOn_O_7 etc. Configuration Filter Times OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules
-

(1 byte per group) for OrF to ON transition. Operates on groups of 8 points.

Valid DC Ii Iter times=O, 1, 2ms
Valid AC filter times=1, 2ms
OpenWireEn Configuration Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic.
-

(1 bit per point) O=disable, 1=enable

Input Data Tags

TableA.7
Diagnostic Input Module Input Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
CSmmestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to
-

(8 bytes) indicate the time that data changed (see COSOffOnEn, COSOnOffEn,
COSStatus, DiagCOSDisable) andlor the time that a diagnostic fault
occurred (see OpenWireEn, FieldPwrLossEn).
Data Input data Off/On status for the input point.
(1 bit per point) 0=Off, 1=On
Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and
(1 bit per point) input data for that point may be incorrect. Check other diagnostic faults, if
they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication
to the input module is lost or inhibited, then all points for the module will be
faulted by the processor.
O=no fault, 1 =fault (OpenWire or FieldPwrloss or Comm Fault)
FieldPwrloss Input Data Field Power loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed
-

(1 bit per point) or is disconnected from the module. Open Wire will also be detected.
O=no fault, 1 =fault
OpenWire Input data Open Wire Diagnostic which detects that a wire has been disconnected
-

(1 bit per point) from the input point. If a group of points all show this fault, then possibly the
return (L1 or GND) is missing from the module. Also see FieldPwrLoss.
O=no fault, 1 =fault

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

A-a Using Software Configuration Tags

Diagnostic Output Module Tags

Tables A.S to A.I 0 list and define all tags that may be used for
ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules. Output modules have
three types of tags

• configuration
• input data
• output data.

The table below lists all possible diagnostic output

module tags. In each application, though, the series
of tags varies, depending on how the module is
configured.

Configuration Tags

Table A.S
Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
FaultlatchEn Configuration Fault is latched - If enabled for a point, any NoLoad, OutputVerifyfault or
(1 bit per point) fieldPwrLoss will stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer
exists until the User clears the fault. This does not affect fuseBlown; it is
always latched.
O=disable, l=enable latching
FaultMode Configuration Fault Mode - Used in conjunction with faultValue to configure the state of
(1 bit per point) outputs when a communications fault occurs. See faultValue.
O=Use FaultValue (OFF or ON), l=Hold last State
FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with faultMode to configure the state of
-

(1 bit per point) outputs when a communications fault occurs. See faultMode.
O=OFF, l=ON
FieldPwrlossEn Configuration Field Power loss Enables field Power Loss diagnostic.
-

(1 bit per point) O=disable, l=enable

NoloadEn Configuration No load Enables No Load diagnostic.
-

(1 bit per point) O=disable, l=enable

OutputVerifyEn Configuration Output Verify - Enables Output Verify diagnostic.
(1 bit per point) O=disable, l=enable

Publication 1 756·UM05SC·EN·P . March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A-9

Table A.S
Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
ProgMode ·Configuration Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state
-

(1 bit per point) of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode. See ProgValue.
O=Use ProgValue (OFF or ON), l=Hold Last State
ProgValue Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state
-

(1 bit per point) of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode. See ProgMode.
O=OIf, l=On
ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of
-

(1 byte per module) outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode.
Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode. See ProgMode, ProgValue,
FaultMode, FaultValue.
Q=outputs stay in Program Mode if comm failure
l=outputs got to FaultMode if comm failure

Input Data Tags

Table A.9
Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 1/0 Data:
CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input
-

(8 bytes) data including fUSing (see BlownFuse, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault,

FieldPwrLoss), which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes
away.
Data Input data Data Off/On status for the output pOint ECHOED back from the output
-

(1 bit per point) module. This is used to verify proper communication only No field side
verification is done. For field side verification, see OutputVerifyFault.
O=OIf, l=On
Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and
(1 bit per point) I/O data for that point may be incorrect. Check other diagnostic faults, if they
are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to the
input module is lost or inhibited, then all points for the module will be faulted
by the processor.
O=no fault, l=fault (FuseBlown, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault,
FieldPwrLoss, or CommFault)
FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed
-

(1 bit per point) or is disconnected from the module. No Load will also be detected.
O=no fault, l=fault

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
A�10 Using Software Configuration Tags

Table A.9
Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
FuseBlown. Input Data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short
-

(1 bit per point) circuit condition for an output point. All FuseBlown conditions are latched and
must be reset by the User.
O=no fault, l=fault
NoLoad Input data No Load Diagnostic which indicates the absence of a load (e.g. the wire is
-

(1 bit per group) disconnected from the module). This diagnostic only operates in the OFF
state.
O=no fault, l=fault
OutputVerifyFault Input data Output Verify Diagnostic which indicates that the output has been
-

(1 bit per point) commanded to the ON state but the output has not been verified to be ON.
O=no fault, l=fault (output is not ON)

Output Data Tag

Table A.10
Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags

Name (as listed in Configuration Definition:

the Tag Editor): or 110 Data:
CSTIimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with
-

(8 bytes) Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time (CSD. Used to synchronize
outputs across the system by indicating the time (CST Timestamp) at which
the output module is to apply its outputs.
Data Output data OffiOn status for the output point. originating from the controller
(1 bit per point) O=Off, l=On

Publication 1 756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A�11

Accessing the Tags When you access tags, you have two options, You can:

• monitor tags - option allows you to view tags and change their
values
• edit tags - option allows you to add or delete tags but not
change values

1. Select Controller Tags

2. Click on the right mouse button to
display the menu
3, Select Monitor Tags

You can view tags here,

Click on the slot number of

the module you want to see

Configuration information is
listed for each point on the
module located at local 2:C

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

A·12 Using Software Configuration Tags

Changing Configuration Some configurable features are changed on a module-wide basis and
some on a pOint-by-point basis.
Through the Tags
Although you can change the value for any point in
the tags, the module's configuration is not updated
until you download the information, see page A- 14.

Module Properties Dialog

Pull down this menu and --�

click here to go offline.

Once you are offline, you can make configuration changes.

Module-wide Configurable Features

For features, such as Program to Fault enable, that are configured on a

module-wide basis, highlight the value and type in the new value.

In the Data Monitor

1 . Highlight the value here
2. Type a new value

RSLogix 5000 will not allow you to enter invalid values for any
feature. If you enter an invalid value, the software prompts you to
reenter the value. You cannot proceed until a valid value is entered.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A-13

Point-by-Point Configurable Features

For features, such as No Load enable, that are configured on a

point-by-point basis, there are two ways to change the configuration .
• Pull-down Menu

or

• Highlight Value

Pull-down Menu

1. Click on the far left side of the Valll,e

--­

column and a pull-down menu appears

2. Highlight the point that needs to be NOTE: RSLogix 5000 will not allow
changed and type a valid new value you to enter invalid values
for point-by-point features

Publication 1756·UMOS8C-EN-P - March 2001

A-14 Using Software Configuration Tags

Highlight Value

1 . Highlight the value of the feature

you want to change. Note that this
series of values is listed in
descending order of point number.
Make sure you have highlighted
the point you want to change.

2. Type in the valid new value.

Downloading New After you change the configuration data for a module, the change
does not actually take affect until you download the new information.
Configuration Data
From the Tag Editor

Pull down this menu and click --­

here to download the new data

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Using Software Configuration Tags A-15

RSLogix 5000 verifies the download process with this pop-up screen.

Click here to download new data

This completes the download process.

Sample Series of Tags

7 756-IA 761

The set of tags associated with a 1756-IA 1 61 module that was

configured using CST Timestamped Input Data for its
Communications Format is shown below.

The configurable features for this configuration are as follows:

• Filter Times
• Change of State
When you access the tags for this module as described on page A- l l ,
you see the screen below.

Filter times for groups of points

Change of state: ON to OFF or OFF to ON

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

A-16 Using Software Configuration Tags

7756-0ABO

The set of tags associated with a 1 7S6-0ASD module that was

configured using Full Diagnostics Output Data for its
Communications Format is shown below.

The configurable features for this configuration are as follows.

• Fault Mode and Value

• Program Mode and Value
• Diagnostic Latch
• No Load
• Output Verify
• Field Power Loss

When you access the tags for this module as described on page A-l l ,
you see the screen below.

Fault mode and value

Program mode and value

Diagnostic latch enable
No load enabled
Output verify enable
Field power loss enable

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P · March 2001

 Appendix B

Using ladder logi c

You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your
module. For example, page 6-22 shows how to reset an electronic
fuse on the 1 756-0A8D module using RSLogix 5000. This appendix
provides an example of how to reset the same fuse without using
RSLogix 5000.

In addition to performing run time services, you can use ladder logic
to change configuration. Chapter 6 explained how to use the RSLogix
5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix
analog I/O module. Some of those parameters may also be changed
through ladder logic.

Using Message In ladder logic, you can use Message instructions to send occasional
services to any ControlLogix 110 module. Message instructions send
Instructions an explicit service to the module, causing specific behavior to occur,
for example, unlatching a high alarm.

Message instructions maintain the following characteristics:

• messages use unscheduled portions of system

communications bandwidth

• one service is performed per instruction

• performing module services does not impede module

functionality, such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
B·2 Using ladder logic

Processing Real-Time Control and Module Services

Services sent via message instructions are not as time critical as the
module behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a
real·time connection. Therefore. the module processes messaging
services only after the needs of the 110 connection have been met.

For example. you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the
module. but real· time control of your process is still occurring using
the input value from that same channel. Because the input value is
critical to your application. the module prioritizes the sampling of
inputs ahead of the unlatch service request.

This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same

frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time
between sampling and producing the real·time input data.

One Service Performed Per Instruction

Message instructions will only cause a module service to be

performed once per execution. For example. if a message instruction
sends a service to the module to unlatch the high high alarm on a
particular channel. that channel's high high alarm will unlatch. but
may be set on a subsequent channel sample. The message instruction
must then be reexecuted to unlatch the alarm a second time.

Publication 1 756·UM05BC·EN·P . March 2001

 Using ladder logic 6-3

Creating a New Tag This ladder logic is written in the Main Routine section of RSLogix
5000.

Double-click here to
enter the Main Routine

•
o •
•

(End)

After adding a message

instruction to a rung, you
must create a tag for the
message instruction

1 Right-click on the
question mark (?) to see
this pull-down menu.
2 Click here to Create a Tag.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN-P - March 2001

B-4 Using Ladder Logic

Fill in the following information when the New Tag pop-up

screen appears:

We suggest you name the tag to indicate what

module service the message instruction is sending.
For example, the message instruction below is used
to reset an electronic fuse, and the tag is named to
reflect this.

Name the tag here.

Enter an optional description here.

Choose the Base Tag Type here.

Choose the Message Data Type here.
Choose the Conlroller Scope here.

IMPORTANT: Message tags can only

be created with the Controller Scope.

Enter Message Configuration

After creating a new tag, you must enter message configuration.

Click here to see the message

configuration pop-up screens

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

 Using Ladder Logic B-5

Enter message configuration on the following screens:

• Configuration pop-up screen

• Communications pop-up screen

A description of the purpose and set-up of each screen follows.

Configuration Pop-Up Screen

This pop-up screen provides information on what module service to

perform and where to perform it For example, you must use this
screen to reset an electronic fuse (module service) on channel 0 of a
17S6-0ABD module (where to perform service) .

Message Type is CIP Generic

Service Code is 4d
Object Type is 1 e
Object ID is 1
Object Attribute is
left blank

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

8-6 Using ladder logic

Table B.2 contains information that must be entered on the

configuration pop-up screen to perform I/O module services:

Table 8.1
Module Services and Configuration Pop-Up Screen Information
Service: Description: Service Object Type Object ID Object Source Number of Destination: Modules:
Code Attnbute Elements
(bytes)

Retrieve Obtain module's 1 77 1 NIA NlA 0 CSTJnformation All

SINT
CST CST status and
informatio check if module is 1201
n synchronized with
the CST.
Retrieve Obtain module's 1 1 1 NIA NIA 0 WHOJnformation All
Device general status SINTl4B1
Informatio such as
n (WHO) ownership, health
and identity.
Reset the Reset module to 5 1 1 NIA NIA 0 NIA All
Module "out of the box
condition" and go
through a
power-up.
Reset Clear any latched 4b 1d input
= 1 NIA Enable_3 4 NIA 1756-0AB
Latched faults except Fuse modules 2]oints 0, 08160,
Diagnostic 810wn 1e = DINT OABE,
output ' IABD,
modules 18160 only
Reset Reset blown fuse 4d 1e = 1 NIA Enable_3 4 Results_32_ 1 756-0AB
Electronic status for a point output 2_Points Points 0, 08160
Fuse module DINT DINT
Pulse Test Performs a pulse 4c 1e 1 NIA Putsc_Test_ 10 NIA 1 756-0AB
Parameters
=

test on the point. output 0, 08160

Only test one point module SINT[10]
at a time.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Using Ladder Logic 6-7

Some services require multiple parameters/tags in the source and

destination fields (e.g. Pulse Test) .

These services use copy instructions to move the multiple tags tolfrom
the message instruction source/destination tags. Table 2 lists the copy
instruction parameters need for these services.

Table B.2
Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services

SourcelDestination Description: Copy Instruction (COP) - This instruction moves data

Tag in MSG tolfrom generic sourceldestination buffers
Instruction:
Source Destination length
(bytes)
Pulse_TesCParamet Determines which point to perform the Enable_32_points Pulse_TesLParameters 4
ers SINTll0J pulse test on. Each bit corresponds to a DINT [OJ
point. Only test one point at a time.
Determines maximum pulse width of the Pulse_Width Pulse_TesLParameters[ 2
pulse test in ms. Pulse test inverts state INT 4J
of the output up to the maximum
specified time. Units are in 100llS
increments. Default tag value = 2ms (Le.
20).
For AC modules only, this specifies how Zero_Cross_Delay Pulse_TesCParameters[ 2
long to delay after the zero cross before INT 6J
performing the pulse test. Optimum time
to perform pulse test is at its peak AC
voltage. Units are in l OOllS increments.
Default tag value = 4ms (Le. 40).
Specifies how long to wait after the pulse OutpuUerify_Delay Pulse_TesLParameters[ 2
is completed before declaring a fault. INT 8J
Output verify delay parameter is needed
to account for the hardware propagation
delay. Units are in lOOllS increments.
Default tag value = 2ms (Le. 20).
CSTjnformation Current CST Time from Module CSTjnformation[O] Current_Time 8
SINTl20J DINT[2J
Status of CST in Module CSTjnformation[8] CST_Status 2
SilO: O=timer OK, 1 =timer fault INT
Bin: O=no ramping, 1 =ramping (ramping
indicates that once time is synchronized,
it will correct errors by slowly ramping to
the master's time)
Bit2: O=not time master, 1 =time master
(e.g. controller)
Bit3: O=time not synced, 1 =time synced
with master
Size of timer in bits CSTjnformation[10J CST_Timer_Size 2
INT
Unused CSTjnformalion[12] CST_reserved 8

PublicaUon 1 756·UM058C·EN·P - March 2001

B-8 Using ladder logic

Table B.2
Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services

SourcelDestination Description: Copy Instruction (COP) - This instruction moves data

Tag in MSG to/from generic source/destination buffers
Instruction:
Source Destination Length
(bytes)
WHOJnformation Device manufaclurer's vendor 10 (e.g. WHOJnformation[O] WHO_vendor 2
SINT[47] l =AB) INT
Device's product type (e.g. 7 =DigitaI I/O) WHOjnformation[2] WHO_producuype 2
INT
Device's catalog code which maps to its WHOjnformation[4] WHO_catalog_code 2
catalog number INT
Device's major revision WHO_lnformation[6] WHO_majouevision 1
SINT
Device's minor revision WHOjnformation[7] WHO_minouevision 1
SINT
Device's internal status WHOjnformation[B] WHO_status 2
BilO: O=unowned, 1 =owned INT
Bit2: O=unconfigured, 1 =configured
Bits7-4: forms a 4-bit number indicating
Device Specific Status
For Digital 110:
0 = Self-Test
1 = Flash update in progress
2 = Communications fault
3 = Not owned
4 = Unused
5 = Internal fault (module needs to be
flash updated)
6 = Run Mode
7 = Program Mode (N/A for input
modules)
BitS: O=no fault. 1 =Minor recoverable
fault (e.g. backplane error detected)
Bit9: O=no fault, l :=Minor non-recoverable fault
Bitl0: O=no fault. 1 =Major recoverable
fault
Bit1 1 : O=no fault. 1 =Major
non-recoverable fault (e.g. module needs
to be reflashed)
Bits1 5-12: unused
Device's serial number WHOjnformation[10] WHO_seriaLnumber 4
DINT
Number of characters in the text string. WHOjnformation[14] WHO_stringjength 1
SINT
Device's ASCII text string describing the WHOjnformation[15] WHO_asciUtring 32
module.

Pubncation 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Using ladder logic 8-9

Table 3 lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the
Message Instructions.

Table 8.3
Source and Destination Field Tags

Source Tag: Description:

Enable_32_Points Parameter used to determine which points are enabled
DINT for the service e.g. If bit a 1 for Reset Fuse, then point
=

a has its electronic fuse reset.

Results_32]oints Pass (0)/ Fail (1) result for the service i.e. If bit 0 = 1 for
DINT the results of the Reset Fuse, then the Reset Fuse failed
for point O.

Communications Pop-Up Screen

This pop-up screen provides information on the path of the message

instruction. For example, the slot number of a l 7S6-0ASD module
distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for.

Use the Browse button to see a list of the 1/0

modules in the system . You choose a path when you
choose a module from the list.
You must name an I/O module during initial module
configuration to choose a path for your message
instruction.

Use this Browse

button to see a
list such as the
one displayed
below.

Publka!'ron 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

8-10 Using ladder logic

Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs

This example demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and

scheduled outputs for digital I/O. The CST can be utilized to
synchronize the output turning OFF to ON based upon the time that
the input transitioned OFF to ON. The program can be extended to
include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same
timestamp to all output modules.

For this example, the output will follow the state of the input 0, but it
will be delayed by exactly l Oms. The advantage of using CST (over
timers) is that the synchronization is being performed at the I/O
module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or
communication delays.

Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing

loads. For this synchronization to work properly, the l Oms delay must
be long enough to account for any controller, backplane, and network
delays. The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as
a Time Master (i.e. Controller) Timestamp units are �secs.

Rungs 0 and 1 are used to detect

the transition from PROGRAM to
RUN mode. This is used to turn ON
"init" which causes the program to
initialize its tags

Rung 2 only executes once and

initializes the LastTimestamp.
LastTimestamp is used to detect a
Change of State on the input point
by checking to see if the timestamp
of the input data has changed

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Using Ladder Logic 8-11

Rung 3 is the main rung which checks for Change of State on the
input point by comparing the current input timestamp (i.e.
Time3cwhich_Input_Changed) with the last timestamp (i.e.
LastTimestamp) .

The input point (i.e. point 0) must have Change of State enabled or
the timestamp will not update when the point transitions (e.g.
OFF-ON) . Once Change of State has been detected, l Oms is ADDed to
the input timestamp and sent to the output module's timestamp.

This will cause the output module to apply its output exactly 10ms
(i.e. 1O,000/1s) after the input changed state.

The MOVe instructions update "LastTimestampU" in preparation for the

next change of state.

Timestamps are 8 bytes in size, two DINTs, but only

IMPORTANT
'" " '"" "
the lower 4 bytes of the output timestamp (i.e.
Time_acwhich_OutpuCWill_Change) are used to
schedule the outputs into the future (to a max of
16.7s or 16,700,000/1s

Publication 1 755-UM058C-EN·P - March 2001

B-12 Using Ladder Logic

Rung 4 is the standard XIC-OTE rung which controls the output point
based upon the input pOint.

The only difference is that the output module is configured for

Scheduled Outputs. The outputs will not get applied until the
scheduled time has occurred.

The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder
logic as they appear in the tag editor.

These tags were created ___

for this ladder logic.

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Using Ladder Logic 8-13

Resetting a Fuse, Performing the Pulse Test

and Resetting Latched Diagnostics

Version 8 of the RSLogix CD contains a sample

progaram for the Pulse Test

The following ladder logic program shows how to reset the electronic
fuse of a faulted point and perform a pulse test through ladder logic_

Rungs 0 and 1 are used to

perform a reset fuse service
on Bits 0 and 1 , respectively,
of a 1 756-0ABO module in slot ly;:.. · LtfGar.wir
4_ HIII� D:rl.:i

Rung 2 performs a pulse test

service to slot 4 .

Rung 3 moves the results of

the pulse test to a data
storage location. (The actual
results appear in the message
instruction tags under the tag
name EXERRj

Rung 4 performs a reset

latched diagnostics service to
slot 4. This example shows an
output module.

Click on the box in each rung to see the configuration and communication
information pop-up associated with it. Examples of these pop-ups can be
found on the following pages

The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder
logic as they appear in the tag editor_

These tags were created�....

for this ladder logic.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

8-14 Using ladder logic

Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status

This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module

identification and status through a WHO service. In this application. a
message instruction retrieves the following module identification
information:

• Product type
• Product code
• Major revision
o Minor revision
• Status
• Vendor
• Serial number
• String length
• Ascii string

A full explanation of each module identification category above is

provided after the ladder logic application.

This example uses a user-defined WHO data

structure and a series of Copy instructions (following
the Message instruction in the screen capture below)
to make the module identification information more
easily understood.

The user-defined data structure appears below.

The user-defined WHO data

structure displays module
identification information in
an easily understood format.

For example, major revision

displays that the module's
major revision is 2.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Using Ladder Logic B-15

You do not have to create the user-defined data structure. If you

choose not to create this structure, you can use the Ascii string and
String length to retrieve and understand module identification through
some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software.

The screen below shows the example WHO ladder logic application.

Rung 0 constantly polls the module for

WHO status. To conserve bandwidth, only
poll for status when necessary.

Rung 1 extracts the product type and

catalog code.

Rung 2 extracts the modu!e's major

and minor revisions.

Rung 3 extracts the module's

status information.

Rung 4 extracts the vendor 10 and

serial number.

Rung 5 extracts the module's ASCII

text string and the length of the text
string in bytes.

Use Table 4 to understand the values returned for each rung.

Table B.4
Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application
Rung: Destination Description:
(Module Identification Retrieved):
Rung 1 Product Type Module's product type, 7 Digital 1/0
=

1 0 Analog 110
=

Catalog Code Module's catalog number.

Rung 2 Major Revision Module's major revision
Minor Revision Module's minor revision

Publication 1 756-UMOSBC·EN-P . March 2001

B-16 Using Ladder Logic

Table 8.4
Rung Values for Example WHO ladder logic Application

Rung: Destination Description:

(Module Identification Retrieved):
Rung 3 Status Module's status. Multiple bits listed.
Bit 0: 0 = Unowned, 1 Owned
=

Bit 1 : Reserved
Bit 2: 0 = Unconfigured, 1 Configured
=

Bit 3: Reserved
Bits 7 -4: Forms a 4-bit number indicating Device
Specific Status.
0 = Self-Test
1 = Flash update in progress
2 Communications fault
=

3 Not owned (outputs in prog. mode)

=

4 unused
=

5 Internal fault (need flash update)

=

6 Run mode
=

7 = Program mode (output mods only)

Bit 8: 0 No fault, 1 Minor recoverable fault
= =

Bit 9: 0 No fault, 1 = Minor unrecoverable fault

=

Bit 10: 0 No fault, 1 = Major recoverable fault

=

Bit 1 1 : 0 = No fault, 1 Major unrecoverable fault

=

Bits 1 5-12: Unused

Rung 4 Vendor 10 Module manufacturer vendor, 1 = Allen-Bradley
Serial Number Module serial number
Rung 5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module's text string
ASCII Text String Module's ASCII text string description

Using Tags in ladder logic

When using tags in ControlLogix digital I/O ladder logic applications,

you must remember the following:

• Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit

basis.For example, point 0 bit 0 on the module
=

• If you are performing a service through the tags, a value of 0

prevents the action from occurring, and a value of 1 causes the
action to occur. For example, if you want to reset the electronic
fuse on a particular bit, enter 1 in the tags.

• If you are checking the response of a service through the tags,

a value of 0 means the bit passed the service, and a value of 1
means the bit failed the service. For example, if you perform a
pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit, the
bit passed the test.

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Appendix C

Power Supp ly Sizing Chart

Use the following chart to check the power your ControlLogix chassis
is using.

Table C.l
Power Supply Sizing Chart
Slot Module Current @ S.1V Power @ Current @ Power @ 24 Current @ Power @
Number Catalog DC (rnA) S.lV DC 24 VDC (Watts) 3.3VDC 3.3V DC
Number (Watts) VDC (rnA) (rnA) (Watts)
0 x 5.1V= x 24V= x 3.3V -
1 x 5.1V - x 24V - x 3.3V -
2 x 5.1V= x 24V= x 3.3V=

3 x 5.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V=

4 x 5.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V -

5 x 5.1V - x 24V - x 3.3V -
6 x S.lV - x 24V - x 3.3V -
7 x S.lV - x 24V - x 3.3V -
8 x S.1V x 24V - x 3.3V -
9 x S.lV - x 24V - x 3.3V -
10 x 5.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V -
11 x 5.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V=

12 x 5.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V=

13 x S.1V - x 24V - x 3.3V-

14 x S.lV - x 24V - x 3.3V -

15 x S.1V - x 24V= x 3.3V -
16 x 5.1V - x 24V - x 3.3V -
TOTALS rnA W (l) rnA W (2) mA W (3)
This number This This number
cannot exceed: number cannot
. lOOOOmA for cannot exceed
lJ56·PA72iPB72 exceed 4000mA
. 13000mA for 2800mA
lJ56·PAJ5/PBJ5
These three wattage values (1, 2, 3), added together, cannot exceed:

• 70W @ 40'C For 1 7S6·PA72/PB72, Series A

•

SSW @ 60'C . For 1756·PA72/PB72, Series A

• 7SW @ 40'/60°C · For 1 756·PA72IPB72, Series B and 17S6·PA7S/PB7S, Series

A
We recommend that you copy this worksheet for use in checking
the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used.

Publication 1 756·UM05BC·EN·P . March 2001

C-2 Power Supply Sizing Chan

Notes:

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Appendix D

Driving Motor Starters with Control logix

Digital 1/0 Modules

Use this appendix to choose a ControlLogix digital I/O module to

drive Bulletin 500 Series motor starters in your application. The tables
below list the number of motor starters (5 sizes are listed for each
module) that a particular digital I/O module can drive.

When using the tables, remember that the supply

voltage for each module must not drop below the
minimum state motor starter supply voltage.

Table 0.1
Maximum Allowed 2-3 Pole Motor Starters (120V ae/60Hz)

Catalog Number Size 0-1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5

Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter
1 756·0A161 16 ° ° ° °
15 @ 30 C 1 3 @ 30 C 8 @ 30 C 5 @ 30 C
° ° ° °
12 @ 60 C 1 0 @ 60 C 6 @ 60 C 4 @ 60 C
1 756·0A16 16 14 4 None None
(Only 7 per group) (Only 2 per group)
1 756·0A8 8 8 8 ° °
8 @ 30 C 5 @ 30 C
° °
6 @ 60 C 4 @ 60 C
1756·0A8D 8 8 8 None None
1 756·0A8E 8 8 8 6 °
6 @ 30 C
(Only 3 per group) (Only 3 per group)
°
4 @ 60 C
(Only 2 per group)

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

D-2 Driving Motor Starters with Controllogix Digital 1/0 Modules

Table 0.2
Maximum Allowed 2·3 Pole Motor Starters (230V ae/60Hz)

Catalog Number Size 0-1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5

Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter
1756-0A161 16 16 16 ° °
16 @ 30 C 1 1 @ 30 C
° °
13 @ 60 C 9 @ 60 C
1 756-0A16 16 16 16 4 2
(Only 2 per group) (Only 1 per group)
1756-0AS 8 S S S S

Table 0.3
Maximum Allowed 2·3 Pole Motor Starter (24V ae/60Hz)

Catalog Number Size 0·1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5

Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter
1 756·0N8 ° ° None None None
4 @ 30 C 4 @ 30 C
° °
3 @ 60 C 3 @ 60 C

Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters

To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used

by a particular 1756 catalog number refer to the following example:

1 . Choose your motor starter:

Allen·Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V ac/60Hz/ 2-3 Poles,

Inrush 1 225VA, Sealed=45VA

2. Determine the number of Motor starters required for your

application:

1 2 size 3 motor starters

Publication 1756·UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules D�3

3. Choose a ControlLogix digital output module :

l 7S6-0A1 6I1A
Outp"t voltage = 7 4 - 26SV ac
°
Output steady state current per point = 2A maximum @ 30 C
°
& I A maximum @ 60 C (Linear derating)
Output steady state current per module = 5A maximum @
°
30 C
°
& 4A maximum @ 60 C (Linear derating)
Output surge current per point = 20A maximum for
°
43mS repeatable every 2S @ 60 C

4. Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature:

°
SO C

5. Confirm the voltage Range is within the Motor starter range:

Motor Starter uses l 20V ac

l 756-0A1 6I1A operates in a 74 - l 20V ac voltage range

6. Confirm the inrush current per point:

Inrush of motor starter - Line voltage = Inrush current = 1 225VA/

120V ac 1O.2Amps Inrush
=

The 17 S6-0A161 allows 20A Inrush current from above

°
specification at @ 60 C

7. Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive
the motor starter:

Sealed/Line voltage = Steady state current = 45VAl120V ac

°
= 0.375A @ SO C

O
Output point current can drive: 2A - .
( 033ma X W C)
°
=2A - O.33A 1.67 A @ So c
=

°
Above 30 C. output point derates to .033mAlC (point derating)

The l 756-0A1 6I1A output point current ( 1 .67A) can drive the
motor starter (0.375A) @ so°c

Publication 1756·UM058C·EN·P March 2001

•
Dw4 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1/0 Modules

8. Confirm the 1 756-0A1 6J/A total module current can drive 1 2

"
size 3 motor starters @ 50 C:

Motor starter steady state current X I I motor starters = .375 X 12

"
= 4.5A @ SO C

The output total module current can drive : SA - .

( 033ma X
" "
!D C) SA O.33A 4.67 A @ SO C
= - =

"
Above 30 C total output current derates to .033mA/C
(Module derating)

The 1756-0A1 6J/A total output current (4.67A) can drive

the 1 2 motor starters (4.SA) @ SO C
"

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P . March 2001

 Index

Numerics 1756-0CB

1756-IA16
Module-specific information 7-50
1756-0HBI
Module-specific information 7-2
1756-IA161 Module-specific information 7-52
1756-0NB
Module-specific information 7-4
1756-IABO
Module-specific information 7-54
1756-0V16E
Module-specific information 7-6
1756-IB16 Module-specific information 7-56
1756-0W161
Module-specific information 7-8
1756-18160 Module-specific information 7-58
1756-0XBI
Module-specific information 7-10
1756-IB161 Module-specific information 7-60
Module-specific information 7-12
1756-IB32 A
Module-specific information 7-14 Accessing Module Tags A- I I
1756-IC16 Agency Certification
Module-specific information 7- 1 6 Class I Division 2, UL, CSA. FM and CE I - I , 3-10, 3-1 1,
1756-IH161 4-10, 4-1 1
Module-specific information 7- 1 8
1756-IM161 B
Module-specific information 7-20
Bidirectional Connections 2-6, 2-8
1756-IN16
Module-specific information 7-22
1756-IV16 C
Module-specific information 7-24 Cage Clamp RTB 5-4
1756-IV32 CE Certification I - I , 3- 1 1, 4- 1 1
Module-specific information 7-26 Change of State
1756-0A16 Diagnostic change of state 4-16
Module-specific information 7-28 Change o f State (COS) P-2, 2-10, 3- 1 1 , 4-14, 4-16,
1756-0A161 6-12, A-2
Module-specific information 7-30 Diagnostic modules 4-16, 4-25
1756-0AB Class I Division 2 Certification I - I , 3-10, 4-10
Module-specific information 7-32 Communications
1756-0ABO Producerlconsumer model 2-9, 2-14
Module-specific information 7-34 Communications Format P-2, 6-3, 6-6
1756-0ABE Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6-5, 6-7
Module-specific information 7-36 CST timestamped fuse data - output data 6-7
1756-0B160 CST timestamped fuse data - scheduled output data 6-8
Module-specific information 7-38 CST timestamped input data 6-6
1756-0B16E Full diagnostic - output data 6-7
Module-specific information 7-40 Full diagnostic input data 6-6
1756-0B161 Full diagnostics - scheduled output data 6-8
Module-specific information 7-42 Input module formats 6-6
1756-0B32 Listen-only 6-6, 6-8
Module-specific information 7-44 Listing for all 110 modules 6-9
1756-0BB Output module formats 6-7
Module-specific information 7-46 Rack optimization P-3, 6-6, 6-8
1756-0BBEI Scheduled output data 6-7
Module-specific information 7-48 Usage tip 6-6

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

Index 2

Compatible Match Coordinated System Time (CST) P-2

Electronic keying 3-5, 4-5 CSA Certification 1-1, 3-1 1, 4- 1 1
Configuration CST Timestamped Fuse Data · Output Data
Accessing module tags 6-23, A- I I Communications Format 6- 7
Altering the default configuration 6-10 CST Timestamped Fuse Data · Scheduled Output Data
Changing through module tags A- 1 2 Communications Format 6-8
Configuring a diagnostic input module 6-14 CST Timestamped Input Data Communications Format
Configuring a diagnostic output module 6-15 6-6
Configuring a nondiagnostic input module 6-12
Configuring a nondiagnostic output module 6- 13
D
Configuring modules i n remote chassis 6-19
Data Exchange
Creating a new module 6-4
Producer/consumer model 1-1 2-9 , 2-14 , 3-9 , 4-9
Downloading new data A- 1 4 '
Data Transmissions
Downloading new data from the tag editor A- 1 4
'

Aqjusting the RPI 6- 1 8

Dynamic reconfiguration 6-16
Choosing a n input module communications format 6-6
Editing configuration in RSLogix 5000 6-16
Choosing an output module communications format 6-7
Local vs. remote chassis 6-2
COS 2-10, 3-1 1, 4-14, 4-16
Message configuration with ladder logic B-4
Overview of the process 6-2 Diagnostic Change o f state 4-16
Diagnostic output modules 4·25
Reconfiguring in program mode 6- 1 8
RPI P-3, 2-10, 3- 1 1 , 4-14, 4-16, 4-25
Reconfiguring in remote run mode 6-17
Using module tags A-3, A-4, A-6, A-8 Using COS on nondiagnostic input modules 6· 1 2
Using timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs B-1 0
Using RSLogix 5000 6-2
Using the default configuration 6-10
Default Configuration 6-10
Configuring a ControlLogix System
Diagnostic Change of State 4-16, 4-25
Diagnostic Latching 3-17, 4-1 1
Using RSLogix 5000 2-2
Diagnostic Timestamp 4-1 1
Using RSNetWorx 2-2
Direct Connection P-2, 2-6
Connections P-2, 2-6
Disable Keying
Connector pins on the module 1 -4
Electronic keying 3-6, 4-6
ControlBus P-2, 1-4
Downloading Configuration Data
Differences between direct and rack connections 2-9
From the tag editor A- 1 4
Direct connection P-2, 2-6
Listen-only connection P- 2
Dynamic Reconfiguration 6-16
Listen-only rack optimization 2-7
Number allowed 2-6, 2-7, 2-8 E
Rack connection 2-7 Electronic Keying P·2, 3-4, 4·4, 6- 9
Rack optimization 2-7, 2-8, 6-6 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6-5, 6-9
Control Bus Connector P-2, 1-4 Compatible match P-2, 3-5, 4-5
Controller Disable keying P-2, 3-6, 4-6
Logix5550 Controller P- l , 2-2 Exact match P-2, 3-4, 4-4
Control Net Usage tip 3-5, 4-5
Direct connections 2-6 Electrostatic Discharge
Input modules in remote chassis 2- 1 1 Preventing 1-6
Network Update Time (NUT) P-3 Exact Match
Output modules in remote chassis 2-15 Electronic keying 3-4, 4-4
Rack connection P-3, 2-7 Extended-Depth Housing
Rack optimization P-3, 2-7 Cabinet-size considerations 5-9
Tip on conserving bandwidth 2 - 1 1 Using 5-8, 5-9

Publication 1 756·UM058C·EN·P· March 2001

 Index 3

F J
Fault Reporting Jumper Bar 5-5
Determining fault type with RSLogix 5000 8-5 Using with 1 756-IA161 module 7-4
Diagnostic input modules 4-25 Using with the 1 756-IB161 module 7-12
Diagnostic modules 4-3, 4-12 Using with the 1 756-IH161 module 7-18
Diagnostic output modules 4-17, 4-27 Using with the 1 756-I M 1 61 module 7-20
Standard input modules 3-18 Using with the 1 7 56-0A1 61 module 7-30
Standard modules 3-3 Using with the 1 7 56-0B161 module 7-42
Standard output modules 3-19 Using with the 1 7 56-0W161 module 7-58
Field Power Loss Detection Using with the 1 756-0XBI module 7-60
1 756-IABD module 4-16
1 756-0ABE module 3-17
K
Field Power Loss Word
Diagnostic input modules 4-25, 4-26
Keying 5-2
Electronic 3-4, 4-4
Diagnostic output modules 4-27, 4-28
Mechanical keying 1-4
Standard output modules 3-19, 3-20
Filter Times
Software configurable 3- 1 1 , 4-14 l
F M Certification I-I, 3- 1 1 , 4- 1 1 Ladder Logic
Full Diagnostic - Output Data Communications Format Creating new tag B-3
6-7 Message configuration B-4
Full Diagnostic Input Data Communications Format 6-6 message instruction B-3
Full Diagnostics - Scheduled Output Data Message instructions B-1
Communications Format 6-8 Message number of elements B-6
Fuse Blown Word
Message object attributes B-6
Diagnostic output modules 4-27, 4-28
Message object 10 B-6
Standard output modules 3-19, 3-20
Message object types B-6
Fusing
Message service codes B-6
Dia.gnostic output modules 4-20, 4-24
Module services B-2
Nondiagnostic output modules 3-14
Performing the pulse test B-1 3
Recommended fuses for diagnostic output modules 4-20
Resetting a fuse B-1 3
Recommended fuses for standard output modules 3- 1 5
Resetting latched diagnostics B-1 3
Resetting a fuse in ladder logic B-13
Latched Diagnostics
Resetting electronic fuse i n RSLogix 5000 6-22
resetting with ladder logic B-13
LatChing
H
Diagnostic latching 3-17, 4-1 1
Housing
Leakage Resistor
Choosing the extended-depth housing 5-8
Determining on 1 756-IABD module 7-6
Determining on 1756-IB16D module 7-10
LED Status Indicators 3-10, 4-10
Inhibit Input modules 8-1
Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6- 10 Output modules 8-2
Preventing communication P-2 listen-Only Communications Formats
Input Module Filters
Input modules 6-6
Configuring in RSLogix 5000 3- 1 1 , 4-14, 6-12, 6- 1 4 Output modules 6-8
Input Online Services 6-21 listen-Only Connections P-2, 2-17
Installing the ControlLogix 1/0 Module 5-1
listen-Only Rack Connection 2-7
Interface Module (IFM) P-2, 1 -2
listen-Only Rack Optimization 2-7
Internal Module Operations 2-4

Publication 1756-UM05SnN·p - March 2001

Index 4

Local Chassis Changing configuration A- 1 2

General 1/0 module operation 2-2 Diagnostic input modules A-6
Using input modules 2-10 Diagnostic output modules A-8
Using output modules 2-14 Sample series (input module) A- 1 5
Locking Tab 1-4 Sample series (output module) A- 1 6
Logix5550 Controller P- 1 , 2-2 Standard input modules A-3
Bidirectional connections 2-6, 2-8 Standard output modules A-4
Loss of Field Power 3-13, 4 - 1 8 Module-Specific Information
Loss of Field Power Detection 1756-IA1 6 7-2
Diagnostic output modules 4-24 1756-IA161 7-4
1 756-IABD 7-6
1 756-IB1 6 7-8
M
1 756-IB16D 7 - 1 0
Major Revision P-3, 3-4, 4-4, 6-3 1 756-IB161 7- 1 2
Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6-5
1 756-IB32 7 - 1 4
Considerations for timestamping 3-9, 4-9
1 7 56-IC16 7- 1 6
Marking Diagnostic Data Changes 4- 1 1
1756-IH1 61 7-18
Mechanical Keying 1-4
1756-IM161 7 -20
Message Instructions
1 756-I N 1 6 7-22
In ladder logic B-1
1 756-IV16 7 -24
Minor Revision P-3, 3-4, 4-4, 6-3 1 756-IV32 7 -26
Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6- 5 1 756-0A1 6 7-28
Module Compatibility
1 756-0A1 61 7-30
Diagnostic input modules 4-1 1 756-0AB 7-32
Diagnostic output modules 4- 2
1756-0ABD 7-34
Nondiagnostic input modules 3-1
1 756-0ABE 7-36
Nondiagnostic output modules 3-2
1 756-08160 7-38
Module Fault Word
1 756-0816E 7 -40
Diagnostic input modules 4-25, 4-26
1 756-08161 7-42
Diagnostic output modules 4-27 , 4-28 1 756-0832 7-44
Standard input modules 3- 1 8
1 756-088 7-46
Standard output modules 3-19, 3-20
1 756-088EI 7-48
Module Identification Information 1-5, B-1 4 1 7 56-0C8 7-50
ASCII text string 1-5
1 756-0H81 7-52
Catalog code 1-5
1 756-0N8 7-54
Major revision 1-5
1 756-0V16E 7-56
Minor revision 1-5
1 756-0W161 7-58
Product type 1-5
1 7 56-0X81 7-60
Retrieving 3-3, 4-3 Multiple Owners
Serial number 1-5
Of input modules 2-18
Status 1-5
Vendor 10 1-5
WHO service 1-5 N
Module Services NEMA Clamp RTB 5-4
In ladder logic B-2 Network Update Time (NUn P-3
Module Status No Load Detection
Retrieving 1-5, B-1 4 Diagnostic output modules 4-21
Module Tags N o Load Word
Accessing in RSLogix 5000 6-23, A-I I Diagnostic output modules 4-27, 4 - 2 8

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Index 5

o Pulse Test

Online Services Diagnostic output modules 4-22

Input modules 6-21 Performing with ladder logic B-1 3
Output modules 6-22 Usage tips 4-22
Open Wire Detection 4-15
Open Wire Word R
Diagnostic input modules 4-25, 4-26 Rack Connection 2-7, 2-8
Output Data Echo 2-14, 2-17, 3-13, 4-18 Usage recommendations 2-8
Output Fault State
Rack Connections P-3, 2-7
Configuable in RSLogix 5000 3-12 Rack Optimization P-3, 2-7, 2-8, 6-6
Output Fault States
Rack Optimization Communications Format 6-8
Configuring in RSLogix 5000 4-17 Remote Chassis
Output Online Services 6-22 Configuring remote liD modules 6- 1 9
Output Verification
General 110 module operation 2-3
Diagnostic output modules 4-22 Using input modules 2- 1 1
Output Verify Word Scenarios for data transfer 2-13
Diagnostic output modules 4-27, 4-28 Using output modules 2- 15
Owner Controller
Scenarios For data transfer 2-16
Logix5550 Controller P-I, 2-2 Remote Connections P-3
Ownership 2-2
Remote Run Mode
Direct connections 2-6
Reconfiguring the module 6-17
Listen-only 2-17
Removable Terminal Block (RTB) P-3, 1-2, 1-4, 5-2
Listen-only rack optimization 2-7
Multiple owners P-3 Installing 5-10
Multiple owners of input modules 2-18 Mechanically keying the RTB 5-2
Removing 5-12
Owner controller P-3
Using with the housing 5-7
Owner-controller-I/O module relationship 2-2
Wiring the RTB 5-4
Rack connection P-3, 2-7
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) P-3, 1 - 1 ,
Rack optimization 2-7, 2-8
1 -6, 3-3, 4-3, 5-1
Remote connections P-3. 2-1 1 . 2 - 1 5
Requested Packet interval (RPI) P-3, 2-10, 3- 1 1 , 4 - 1 4,
4-16, 4-25
p Adjusting in RSLogix 5000 6- 10, 6-18
Point level Fault Reporting Retrieving Module Identification Information 1-5, B-14
Diagnostic modules 4-12 Retrieving Module Status 1-5, B-14
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 1-6 RSlogix 5000
Producer/Consumer Configuring 1/0 modules 2-2, 3-3, 4-3, 6-2
Communications I - I Filtertimes 3-1 1 , 4-14
Network model I - I , 2-9, 2-14, 3-9, 4-9 I/O modules i n remote chassis 2-3
Product Identification Using software configuration tags A- I
Catalog number 3-4, 4-4 Using to troubleshoot 8-4
Major revision P-3, 3-4, 4-4 Using with RSNetWorx 2-2
Minor revision P-3, 3-4, 4-4 RSNetWorx
Product type 3-4, 4-4 1/0 modules in remote chassis 2-3
Vendor 3-4, 4-4 Transferring data to networked I/O modules and
Program Mode P-3 establ ishing a NUT 2-2
Reconfiguring the module 6-18 Using with RSLogix 5000 2-2

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

Inde)( 6

S System Time

Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6-7 A<!justing the RPI 6-10
Scheduled Outputs 3-7, 4-7 Choosing a timestamped input communications format
Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6-7 6-6
Usage tips 3-8, 4-8 Choosing a timestamped output communications format
Used with timestamping 3-8, 4-8 6-7
Used with timestamping in ladder logic B-1 O Diagnostic timestamp 4- 1 1
Software Configuration Tags A- I Schedule outputs 3-7, 4-7
Specifications Timestamping inputs 3-7, 4-7
1 7 56-IA1 6 module 7-3 Using scheduled outputs with timestamping 3-8, 4-8
1 7 56-IA161 module 7-5 Using timestamping P-3, I - I
1 756-IABD module 7-7
1756-IB16 module 7-9 T
1 7 56-IB16D module 7-1 1 Tag Editor
1 756-IB161 module 7-13 Downloading new configuration A - 1 4
1 756-IB32 module 7- 15, 7-27 Timestamping 6-6, 6-7
1756-IC16 module 7-17 Considering module major revision 3-9, 4-9
1756-IH161 module 7-19 Diagnostic Timestamp 4-1 1
1756-IM161 module 7-21 For a sequence of events 3-7, 4-7
1 756-IN16 module 7-23 Marking input data change with relative time reference
1 756-IV1 6 module 7-25 P-3, 3-7, 4-7
1 756-0A1 6 module 7-29 System timestamp I - I
1 756-0A1 61 module 7-3 1 Tip for using change of state 3-7, 4-7
1 756-0AB module 7-33 Used with scheduled outputs 3-8, 4-8, 6-8, B-I0
1 756-0ABD module 7-35 Tips
1 756-0ABE module 7-37 Conserving Control Net bandwidth 2-1 1
1 756-0B16D module 7-39 Electronic keying options 3-5, 4-5
1 7 56-0B16E module 7-4 1 , 7-57 Scheduled outputs 3-8, 4-8
1 7 56-0B161 module 7-43 Using change of state in timestamping 3-7, 4-7
1 756-0B32 module 7-45 Using listen-only communications format 6-6
1 756-0BB module 7-47 Using pulse test 4-22
1 756-0BBEI module 7-49 Troubleshooting
1 756-0CB module 7-5 1 Fault status 3-10, 4-10
1 7 56-0HBI module 7-53 Fuse status 3-10, 4-10
1 756-0NB module 7-55 1/0 status 3-10, 4-10
1 756-0V16E module 7-57 Module status 3-10, 4-10
1 756-0W161 module 7-59 Module status indicators 1-4, 3-10, 4-10, 8-1, 8-2
17S6-0XBI module 7-61 Using RSLogix 5000 8-4
Spring Clamp RTB 5-5 Types of Controllogix 110 Modules 1 -2
Standard-Depth Housing 5-8
Status Indicators 1-4
Input modules 8-2 U
Output modules 8-3 Ul Certification 1 - 1 , 3- 1 1 , 4-1 1
Status Reporting
Diagnostic input modules 4-25
w
Diagnostic output modules 4-27
Warnings
Standard input modules 3-18
Preventing electrostatic discharge 1 -6
Standard output modules 3-19
Removal and insertion under power (RIUP) 1 -6

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 Index 7

Wiring Connections 1 756-IM161 module 7-20

Choosing the extended-depth housing 5-8 1 756-IN16 module 7-22
Field wiring options 3-14, 4-19 1 756-IV16 module 7-24
Isolated and non-isolated modules 3-12, 4-14 1 756-0A1 6 module 7-28
Recommendations for wiring RTB 5-5 1756-0A1 61 module 7-30
Using the cage clamp RTB 5-4 1 756-0AB module 7-32
Using the interface module (IFM) P-2, 1-2 1 756-0ABO module 7-34
Using the NEMA clamp RTB 5-4 1 756-0ABE module 7-36
Using the removable terminal block (RTB) P-3, 1-2, 5-2, 1 756-0B160 module 7-38
5-4 1 756-0B16E module 7-40, 7-56
Using the spring clamp RTB 5-4 1 756-0B1 61 module 7-42
Wiring Example 1 756-0B32 module 7-44
1 756-IA1 6 module 7-2 1756-0BB module 7-46
1 7 56-IA161 module 7-4, 7-30 1756-0BBEI module 7-48
1756-IABO module 7-6 1 756-0CB module 7-50
1756-IB16 module 7-8, 7-24 1 756-0HBI module 7-52
1756-IB160 module 7-10 1 756-0NB module 7-54
1 7 56-IB161 module 7- 1 2 1 756-0V16E module 7-56
1 7 56-IB32 module 7-14, 7-26 1 756-0W161 module 7-58
1 756-IC16 module 7-16 1 756-0XBI module 7-60
1756-IH161 module 7-18

Publication 1756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

Index 8

N otes:

Publication 1J56-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001

 A l l en-Bradley
Publ ication Problem Report
If you find a problem with our documentation, please complete and return this form.

Pub. Title/Type ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual

Cat. No. 1756-Series

------
Pub. No. 1756-UM058C-EN-P Pub. Date March 2001 Part No. 957345-93

Check Problem(s) Type: Describe Problem(s) Internal Use Only

D Technical Accuracy D text D illustration

D Completeness D procedure/step D illustration D definition D info.;n mi mual

What information is missing? D example D guideline D feature (accessibility)

D explanation D other D info not in manual

D
.

Clarity .
.

What is unclear?

D Sequence
What is not in the right order?

D Other Comments
Use back for more comments_ .

Your Name -------

Location/Phone

Return to: Marketing Communications, Allen-Bradley., 1 Allen-Bradley Drive, Mayfield Hts" OH 44124-6118Phone:(440) 646-3176
FAX:(440) 646-4320

Publication ICCG-5.21- August 1995 PN 955107-82

 PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NDT STAPLE)

OLher Comments

E;
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PLEASE FOLD HERE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
�
�

N O POSTAGE
�
�

NECESSARY
IF MAilED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAil

FIRST·CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

@ Allen-Bradley

!I��
Roclovell
-
--- Automation
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DR
MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 441 24-9705

1,1" 1,1" 1" ,11,,1,1,1,,11,1,,1,,,111,,,,1,1,,1,,11

 3

1756-UM058C-EN-P - March
Reach us nDW at www.rockweliautDmation.com
Wherever you need us, Rockwell Automation brings together leading
brands in industrial automation including Allen·Bradley controls,
Reliance Electric power transmission products, Dodge mechanical power
transmission components, and Rockwell Software. Rockwell Automation's

�
.t."""'"
unique, flexible approach to helping customers achieve a competitive
advantage is supported by thousands of authorized partners, distributors
and system Integrators around the world � AJIIHl·BradJ,y
D<$vE
Americas Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee. WI 53204, USA. Tel (1)414 382·2000, Fax (1)414 382-4444 emmrl Rocltwell
European Headquarters SA/NV, avenue Herrmann Oebroux, 46, 1160 Brussels, BelgllJm, Tel (32) 2 663 06 00, Fax (3212 663 06 40
Automation
_

Asia Pacific Headquarters, 27/F CltlCorp Centre, 18 Whitfield Road, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong, Tel [852) 28874788, Fax (852)2508 1846

Publication 1 756-UM058C-EN-P - March 2001 PN 957345-93

Supersedes Publication 1756·6.5.8 · July 1999 © 2001 Rockwell inlemmiooal Corporalioll Printed in tile U.S.A.